Help updates for SM2. Patch by Neil <neil@parkwaycc.co.uk>
authorMark Tyndall <moz_en-gb@tyndall.org.uk>
Tue, 16 Feb 2010 10:42:41 +0000
changeset 52 d607bb1af32e852ceeac977b7f84f8632b66f14e
parent 51 6a0737f5de9b6fb3ffa6410fc1f5e8e9c266211f
child 53 efa2e6367466e388ec5cb7fa460dab8e487df6f4
push id1
push userroot
push dateWed, 13 Apr 2011 19:42:42 +0000
Help updates for SM2. Patch by Neil <neil@parkwaycc.co.uk>
suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/mail_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts-mailnews.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts-navigator.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf
suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml
suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml
--- a/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml
@@ -1,540 +1,493 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
-  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
-  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
-  %brandDTD;
-]>
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
-<head>
-<title>Certificate Information and Decisions</title>
-<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
-  type="text/css"/>
-</head>
-<body>
-
-<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
-  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
-  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
-  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
-  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
-  protection on the Internet.</div>
-
-<h1 id="certificate_information_and_decisions">Certificate Information and
-  Decisions</h1>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use various windows displayed at different times by
-  Certificate Manager. The additional information given here appears when you click
-  the Help button in one of those windows.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#user_identification_request">User Identification Request</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</h2>
-
-<p>The Certificate Viewer displays information about a certificate you selected
-  in one of the Certificate Manager tabs. The General tab summarises
-  information about who issued the certificate, its verification status, what
-  the certificate can be used for, and so on. The Details tab provides complete
-  details on the certificate&apos;s contents.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Viewer, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
-    the list.)</li>
-  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
-  <li>Click the tab for the type of certificate whose details you want to
-    view.</li>
-  <li>Select the certificate whose details you want to view.</li>
-  <li>Click View.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#general_tab">General Tab</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#details_tab">Details Tab</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h3 id="general_tab">General Tab</h3>
-
-<p>When you first open the Certificate Viewer, the General tab displays several
-  kinds of information about the selected certificate:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>This certificate has been verified for the following
-    uses</strong>: See
-    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_verification">certificate verification</a>
-    for a discussion of how the Certificate Manager verifies certificates. Uses
-    can include any of the following:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>SSL Client Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
-        you to web sites.</li>
-      <li><strong>SSL Server Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
-        a web site server to browsers.</li>
-      <li><strong>Email Signer Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
-        identify you for the purposes of digitally signing email messages.</li>
-      <li><strong>Email Recipient Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
-        identify someone else, for example so you can send that person
-        encrypted email.</li>
-      <li><strong>Status Responder Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
-        identify an online status responder that uses the Online Certificate
-        Status Protocol (OCSP) to check the validity of certificates. For more
-        information about OCSP, see
-        <a href="validation_help.xhtml">Validation Settings</a>.</li>
-      <li><strong>SSL Certificate Authority</strong>: Certificate used to
-        identify a certificate authority&mdash;that is, a service that issues
-        certificates for use as identification over computer networks.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Issued To</strong>: Summarises the following information about
-    the certificate:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Common Name</strong>: The name of the person or other entity
-        that the certificate identifies.</li>
-      <li><strong>Organisation</strong>: The name of the organisation to which
-        the entity belongs (such as the name of a company).</li>
-      <li><strong>Organisational Unit</strong>: The name of the organisational
-        unit to which the entity belongs (such as Accounting Department).</li>
-      <li><strong>Serial Number</strong>: The certificate&apos;s serial
-        number.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Issued By</strong>: Summarises information (similar to that
-    provided under <q>Issued To</q>; see above) about the certificate authority
-    (CA) that issued the  certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>Validity</strong>: Indicates the period during which the
-    certificate is valid.</li>
-  <li><strong>Fingerprints</strong>: Lists the certificate&apos;s fingerprints.
-    A fingerprint is a unique number produced by applying a mathematical
-    function to the certificate contents. A certificate&apos;s fingerprint can
-    be used to verify  that the certificate has not been tampered with.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="details_tab">Details Tab</h3>
-
-<p>Click the Details tab at the top of the Certificate Viewer to see more
-  detailed information about the selected certificate. To examine information
-  for any certificate in the Certificate Hierarchy area, select its name,
-  select the field under Certificate Fields that you want to examine, and
-  read the field&apos;s value under Field Value:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Certificate Hierarchy</strong>: Displays the certificate chain,
-    with the certificate you originally selected at the bottom. A certificate
-    chain is a hierarchical series of certificates signed by successive
-    certificate authorities (CAs). A CA certificate identifies a
-    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
-    and is used to sign certificates issued by that authority. A CA certificate
-    can in turn be signed by the CA certificate of a parent CA and so on up to
-    a <a href="glossary.xhtml#root_ca">root CA</a>.</li>
-  <li><strong>Certificate Fields</strong>: Displays the fields of the
-    certificate selected under Certificate Hierarchy.</li>
-  <li><strong>Field Value</strong>: Displays the value of the field selected
-    under Certificate Fields.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>The Certificate Viewer displays basic ANSI types in human-readable form
-  wherever possible. For fields whose contents the Certificate Manager cannot
-  interpret, it displays the actual values contained in the certificate.</p>
-
-<h2 id="choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</h2>
-
-<p>A security device (sometimes called a token) is a hardware or software
-  device that provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption
-  and stores certificates and keys. The Choose Security Device window appears
-  when Certificate Manager needs help deciding which security device to use
-  when importing a certificate or performing a cryptographic operation, such as
-  generating keys for a new certificate. This window allows you to select one
-  of two or more security devices that Certificate Manager has detected on your
-  machine.</p>
-
-<p>A smart card is one example of a security device. For example, if a smart
-  card reader connected to your computer has a smart card inserted in it, the
-  name of the smart card will show up in the drop-down menu. In this case, you
-  must choose the name of the smart card from the menu to let Certificate
-  Manager know that you want to use it.</p>
-
-<p>The Certificate Manager also supplies its own default, built-in security
-  device, which can always be used no matter what additional devices are or
-  aren&apos;t available.</p>
-
-<h2 id="encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</h2>
-
-<p><a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">Certificate authorities (CAs)</a>
-  that issue separate signing and encryption email certificates typically make
-  backup copies of your private
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption_key">encryption key</a> during the
-  certificate enrollment process.</p>
-
-<p>The Encryption Key Copy dialogue box allows you to approve the creation of
-  such a backup or cancel the certificate request. A CA that has archived a
-  backup copy of your encryption key has the potential capability of
-  decrypting any messages you receive that were encrypted with your
-  corresponding public key.</p>
-
-<p>You can take these actions from the Encryption Key Copy dialogue box:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To view the certificate identifying
-    the CA that is requesting the backup copy, click View Certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>OK</strong>: If you trust the CA identified by the CA certificate
-    to decrypt encrypted messages that you receive, click OK.
-
-    <p>If you are not sure whether to trust the CA that is requesting the
-      backup copy, talk to your system administrator.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you don&apos;t trust the CA that is
-    requesting the backup copy, don&apos;t request a certificate from it. Click
-    Cancel to stop both the backup procedure and the request for a
-    certificate.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>After your CA makes a backup copy of the encryption key, you will be able to
-  use that key to access your encrypted mail even if you lose your password or
-  lose your own copy of the key. If no backup copy of your encryption key
-  exists and you lose your password or the key, you will have no way of reading
-  email messages that were encrypted with that key.</p>
-
-<h2 id="certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</h2>
-
-<p>When you receive a certificate, make a backup copy of the certificate and
-  its private key, then store the copy in a safe place. For example, you can
-  put the copy on a floppy disc and store it with other valuable items under
-  lock and key. That way, even if you have hard disc or file corruption
-  problems, you can easily restore the certificate.</p>
-
-<p>It can be inconvenient, at best, and in some situations catastrophic to lose
-  your certificate and its associated private key, depending on what you use it
-  for. For example:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>If you lose a certificate that identifies you to important web sites, you
-    will not be able to access those web sites until you obtain a new
-    certificate. </li>
-  <li>If you lose a certificate used to encrypt email messages, you will not
-    be able to read any of your encrypted email&mdash;including both encrypted
-    messages that you have sent and encrypted messages that you have received.
-    In this case, if you cannot obtain a backup of the private encryption key
-    associated with the certificate, you will never be able to read any of the
-    messages encrypted with that key.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>Like any other valuable data, certificates should be backed up to avoid
-  future trouble and expense. Do it now so you don&apos;t forget.</p>
-
-<h2 id="user_identification_request">User Identification Request</h2>
-
-<p>Some web sites require that you identify yourself with a certificate rather
-  than a name and password, because certificates provide a more reliable form
-  of identification. This method of identifying yourself over the Internet is
-  sometimes called
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#client_authentication">client authentication</a>.</p>
-
-<p>However, Certificate Manager may have more than one certificate on file that
-  can be used for the purposes of identifying yourself to a web site. In this
-  case, Certificate Manager presents the User Identification Request dialogue
-  box, which displays two kinds of information:</p>
-
-<p><strong>This site has requested that you identify yourself with a
-  certificate</strong>: This section of the dialogue box lists the following
-  information:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Host name</strong>: The name of the server requesting
-    identification, used as part of its URL. For example, the host name for the
-    Netscape web site is <tt>home.netscape.com</tt>.</li>
-  <li><strong>Organisation</strong>: The name of the organisation that runs the
-    web site.</li>
-  <li><strong>Issued under</strong>: The name of the
-    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>
-    that issued the certificate.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>Choose a certificate to present as identification</strong>: The
-  certificates you have available for the purposes of identifying yourself to a
-  web site are listed in the drop-down list in this section of the dialogue box.
-  Choose the certificate that seems most likely to be recognised by the web site
-  you want to visit.</p>
-
-<p>To help you decide, the following details of the selected certificate are
-  displayed:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Issued to</strong>: Lists information about the person identified
-    by the certificate (for example, your name and email address) and the
-    certificate&apos;s serial number and validity dates.</li>
-  <li><strong>Issued by</strong>: Summarises information about the CA that
-    issued the certificate, such as its name, location, and state.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h2 id="new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</h2>
-
-<p>The certificates that the Certificate Manager has on file, whether stored on
-  your computer or on an external security device such as a smart card, include
-  certificates that identify
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities (CAs)</a>.
-  To be able to recognise any other certificates it has on file, Certificate
-  Manager must have certificates for the CAs that issued or authorised issuance
-  of those certificates.</p>
-
-<p>When you decide to trust a CA, Certificate Manager downloads that CA&apos;s
-  certificate and can then recognise the kinds of certificates you trust that
-  CA to issue.</p>
-
-<p>Before downloading a new CA certificate, Certificate Manager allows you to
-  specify the purposes for which you trust the certificate, if at all. You can
-  select any of the following options:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify web sites</strong>: Website certificates
-    for some sites, such as those that handle financial transactions, can be
-    extremely important, and inappropriate or false identification can have
-    negative consequences.</li>
-  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify email users</strong>: If you intend to
-    send email users confidential information in encrypted form, or if accurate
-    identification of email users is important to you for any other reason, you
-    should consider carefully the CA&apos;s procedures for identifying
-    prospective certificate owners and whether they are appropriate for your
-    purposes before selecting this option.</li>
-  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify software developers</strong>: Selecting
-    this option means that you trust the CA to issue certificates that identify
-    the origin of Java applets and JavaScript scripts requesting special access
-    to your computer, such as the ability to change files. Since such access
-    privileges can be misused, for example to destroy data stored on your hard
-    disc, be very careful about selecting this option unless you are certain
-    that you trust the CA for this purpose.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>Before you decide to trust a new CA, make sure that you know who is
-  operating it. Make sure the CA&apos;s policies and procedures are
-  appropriate for the kinds of certificates it issues. For example, if the CA
-  issues certificates identifying web sites you use for financial transactions,
-  make sure you are comfortable with the level of assurance the CA
-  provides.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View</strong>: Click this button to view the CA certificate you
-    are about to download. If you decide you don&apos;t want to download this
-    certificate, click Cancel.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h2 id="web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</h2>
-
-<p>One of the windows listed here may appear when you attempt to go to a
-  web site that supports the use of <a href="glossary.xhtml#ssl">SSL</a> for
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#authentication">authentication</a> and
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption">encryption</a>.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#web_site_certified_by_an_unknown_authority">Website Certified
-      by an Unknown Authority</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#server_certificate_expired">Server Certificate Expired</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#server_certificate_not_yet_valid">Server Certificate Not Yet
-      Valid</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h3 id="web_site_certified_by_an_unknown_authority">Website Certified by an Unknown
-  Authority</h3>
-
-<p>Many web sites use certificates to identify themselves when you visit the
-  site. If Certificate Manager doesn&apos;t recognise the
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority"> certificate authority (CA)</a>
-  that issued a web site&apos;s certificate, it displays an alert that allows
-  you to examine the new web site certificate and decide what to do.</p>
-
-<p>Use the buttons to perform the following actions:</p>
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: Examine the web site&apos;s
-    certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: Cancel the operation. Certificate Manager
-    will not recognise the certificate as legitimate identification and will not
-    connect to the web site.</li>
-  <li><strong>OK</strong>: Accept the certificate and connect to the web site.
-    Choose for how long the certificate should be accepted:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Accept this certificate permanently</strong>: Certificate
-        Manager will recognise the certificate as legitimate identification
-        until the certificate expires.</li>
-      <li><strong>Accept this certificate temporarily for this session</strong>:
-        Certificate Manager will recognise the certificate as legitimate
-        identification only during your current &brandShortName; session. You
-        will see the alert again if you restart &brandShortName; and attempt to
-        visit the web site.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>Important note for server administrators</strong>: This alert may be
-  triggered by a server that is not configured correctly. To find out if this
-  is the case, the server administrator or webmaster for the site you are
-  attempting to visit should check the status of any required intermediate CAs
-  and if necessary, install the missing certificate in the server.</p>
-
-<p>If you decide to contact the web site&apos;s webmaster about this issue, you
-  can include the following information:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>The server administrator can obtain more information about intermediate
-    CAs from here:
-    <a href="http://knowledge.verisign.com/search/solution.jsp?id=vs2119">What
-    is the purpose of the Intermediate CA certificate?</a></li>
-  <li>If the server is using a VeriSign certificate, the server administrator
-    can download the appropriate certificate from here:
-    <a href="http://www.verisign.com/support/ssl-certificates-support/install-ssl-certificate.html">SSL
-    Certificates Support</a></li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>For advanced users</strong>: To ensure that Certificate Manager
-  trusts all certificates issued by a given CA, you can edit the trust
-  settings for the corresponding CA certificate. To do so, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
-    the list.)</li>
-  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
-  <li>Click the Authorities tab.</li>
-  <li>Select the CA certificate whose trust settings you want to edit.</li>
-  <li>Click the Edit button and select the appropriate trust settings.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<h3 id="server_certificate_expired">Server Certificate Expired</h3>
-
-<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s licence, and many other forms of
-  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
-  valid for a specified period of time. When a certificate expires, the owner
-  of the certificate needs to get a new one.</p>
-
-<p>Certificate Manager warns you when you attempt to visit a web site whose
-  server certificate has expired. The first thing you should do is make sure
-  the time and date displayed by your computer is correct. If your
-  computer&apos;s clock is set to a date that is after the expiration date,
-  Certificate Manager treats the web site&apos;s certificate as expired.</p>
-
-<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
-  about whether to trust the site. This decision depends on what you intend to
-  do at the site and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will
-  make sure that they replace their certificates before they expire.</p>
-
-<p>You can take these actions from the Expired Server Certificate dialogue
-  box:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To examine information about the
-    certificate, including its validity period, click View Certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>Continue</strong>: If you have reason to believe the
-    certificate&apos;s expiration is an inadvertent error, you may choose to
-    click Continue to accept the certificate anyway for this session, and let
-    the webmaster for the site know about the problem.
-
-    <p>Be cautious about any actions you take while you are visiting the
-      site.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you suspect that there may be a significant
-    problem and you don&apos;t want to risk visiting the site at all, click
-    Cancel (in which case Certificate Manager will not connect you to the
-    site).</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="server_certificate_not_yet_valid">Server Certificate Not Yet Valid</h3>
-
-<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s licence, and many other forms of
-  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
-  valid for a specified period of time.</p>
-
-<p>Certificate Manager warns you when you attempt to visit a web site whose
-  server certificate&apos;s validity period has not yet started. The first
-  thing you should do is make sure the time and date displayed by your own
-  computer is correct. If your computer&apos;s clock is set to the wrong date,
-  Certificate Manager may treat the server certificate as not yet valid even
-  if this is not the case.</p>
-
-<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
-  about whether to trust the site. This decision depends on what you intend to
-  do at the site and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will
-  make sure that the validity period for their certificates has begun before
-  beginning to use them.</p>
-
-<p>You can take these actions from the Server Certificate Not Yet Valid dialogue
-  box:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To examine information about the
-    certificate, including its validity period, click View Certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>OK</strong>: If you have reason to believe the problem is an
-    inadvertent error, you may choose to click OK to accept the certificate
-    anyway for this session, and let the webmaster for the site know about the
-    problem.
-
-    <p>Be cautious about any actions you take while you are visiting the
-      site.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you suspect that there may be a significant
-    problem and you don&apos;t want to risk visiting the site at all, click
-    Cancel (in which case Certificate Manager will not connect you to the
-    site).</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</h3>
-
-<p>A server <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> specifies the
-  name of the server in the form of the site&apos;s domain name. For example,
-  the domain name for the Mozilla web site is <tt>www.mozilla.org</tt>. If the
-  domain name in a server&apos;s certificate doesn&apos;t match the actual
-  domain name of the web site, it may be a sign that someone is attempting to
-  intercept your communication with the web site.</p>
-
-<p>The decision whether to trust the site anyway depends on what you intend to
-  do at the site and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will
-  make sure that the host name for a web site certificate matches
-  the web site&apos;s actual host name.</p>
-
-<p>You can take these actions from the Domain Name Mismatch dialogue box:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To examine information about the
-    certificate, click View Certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>OK</strong>: If you have reason to believe the problem is an
-    inadvertent error, you may choose to click OK to accept the certificate
-    anyway for this session, and let the webmaster for the site know about
-    the problem.
-
-    <p>Be cautious about any actions you take while you are visiting the site,
-      and treat any information you find there as potentially suspect.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you suspect that there may be a significant
-    problem and you don&apos;t want to risk visiting the site at all, click
-    Cancel (in which case Certificate Manager will not connect you to the
-    site).</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>If you decide to accept the certificate anyway for this session, you should
-  be cautious about what you do on the web site, and you should treat any
-  information you find there as potentially suspect.</p>
-
-<p>&copyright.string;</p>
-
-</body>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Certificate Information and Decisions</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
+  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
+  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
+  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
+  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
+  protection on the Internet.</div>
+
+<h1 id="certificate_information_and_decisions">Certificate Information and
+  Decisions</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use various windows displayed at different times by
+  Certificate Manager. The additional information given here appears when you click
+  the Help button in one of those windows.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#user_identification_request">User Identification Request</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#web_site_certificates">Web site Certificates</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="certificate_viewer">Certificate Viewer</h2>
+
+<p>The Certificate Viewer displays information about a certificate you selected
+  in one of the Certificate Manager tabs. The General tab summarises
+  information about who issued the certificate, its verification status, what
+  the certificate can be used for, and so on. The Details tab provides complete
+  details on the certificate&apos;s contents.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Viewer, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
+  <li>Click the tab for the type of certificate whose details you want to
+    view.</li>
+  <li>Select the certificate whose details you want to view.</li>
+  <li>Click View.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#general_tab">General Tab</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#details_tab">Details Tab</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="general_tab">General Tab</h3>
+
+<p>When you first open the Certificate Viewer, the General tab displays several
+  kinds of information about the selected certificate:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>This certificate has been verified for the following
+    uses</strong>: See
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_verification">certificate verification</a>
+    for a discussion of how the Certificate Manager verifies certificates. Uses
+    can include any of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>SSL Client Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
+        you to web sites.</li>
+      <li><strong>SSL Server Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to identify
+        a web site server to browsers.</li>
+      <li><strong>Email Signer Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify you for the purposes of digitally signing email messages.</li>
+      <li><strong>Email Recipient Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify someone else, for example so you can send that person
+        encrypted email.</li>
+      <li><strong>Status Responder Certificate</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify an online status responder that uses the Online Certificate
+        Status Protocol (OCSP) to check the validity of certificates. For more
+        information about OCSP, see
+        <a href="validation_help.xhtml">Validation Settings</a>.</li>
+      <li><strong>SSL Certificate Authority</strong>: Certificate used to
+        identify a certificate authority&mdash;that is, a service that issues
+        certificates for use as identification over computer networks.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Issued To</strong>: Summarises the following information about
+    the certificate:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Common Name</strong>: The name of the person or other entity
+        that the certificate identifies.</li>
+      <li><strong>Organisation</strong>: The name of the organisation to which
+        the entity belongs (such as the name of a company).</li>
+      <li><strong>Organisational Unit</strong>: The name of the organisational
+        unit to which the entity belongs (such as Accounting Department).</li>
+      <li><strong>Serial Number</strong>: The certificate&apos;s serial
+        number.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Issued By</strong>: Summarises information (similar to that
+    provided under <q>Issued To</q>; see above) about the certificate authority
+    (CA) that issued the  certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Validity</strong>: Indicates the period during which the
+    certificate is valid.</li>
+  <li><strong>Fingerprints</strong>: Lists the certificate&apos;s fingerprints.
+    A fingerprint is a unique number produced by applying a mathematical
+    function to the certificate contents. A certificate&apos;s fingerprint can
+    be used to verify  that the certificate has not been tampered with.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="details_tab">Details Tab</h3>
+
+<p>Click the Details tab at the top of the Certificate Viewer to see more
+  detailed information about the selected certificate. To examine information
+  for any certificate in the Certificate Hierarchy area, select its name,
+  select the field under Certificate Fields that you want to examine, and
+  read the field&apos;s value under Field Value:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Certificate Hierarchy</strong>: Displays the certificate chain,
+    with the certificate you originally selected at the bottom. A certificate
+    chain is a hierarchical series of certificates signed by successive
+    certificate authorities (CAs). A CA certificate identifies a
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
+    and is used to sign certificates issued by that authority. A CA certificate
+    can in turn be signed by the CA certificate of a parent CA and so on up to
+    a <a href="glossary.xhtml#root_ca">root CA</a>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Certificate Fields</strong>: Displays the fields of the
+    certificate selected under Certificate Hierarchy.</li>
+  <li><strong>Field Value</strong>: Displays the value of the field selected
+    under Certificate Fields.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The Certificate Viewer displays basic ANSI types in human-readable form
+  wherever possible. For fields whose contents the Certificate Manager cannot
+  interpret, it displays the actual values contained in the certificate.</p>
+
+<h2 id="choose_security_device">Choose Security Device</h2>
+
+<p>A security device (sometimes called a token) is a hardware or software
+  device that provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption
+  and stores certificates and keys. The Choose Security Device window appears
+  when Certificate Manager needs help deciding which security device to use
+  when importing a certificate or performing a cryptographic operation, such as
+  generating keys for a new certificate. This window allows you to select one
+  of two or more security devices that Certificate Manager has detected on your
+  machine.</p>
+
+<p>A smart card is one example of a security device. For example, if a smart
+  card reader connected to your computer has a smart card inserted in it, the
+  name of the smart card will show up in the drop-down menu. In this case, you
+  must choose the name of the smart card from the menu to let Certificate
+  Manager know that you want to use it.</p>
+
+<p>The Certificate Manager also supplies its own default, built-in security
+  device, which can always be used no matter what additional devices are or
+  aren&apos;t available.</p>
+
+<h2 id="encryption_key_copy">Encryption Key Copy</h2>
+
+<p><a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">Certificate authorities (CAs)</a>
+  that issue separate signing and encryption email certificates typically make
+  backup copies of your private
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption_key">encryption key</a> during the
+  certificate enrollment process.</p>
+
+<p>The Encryption Key Copy dialogue box allows you to approve the creation of
+  such a backup or cancel the certificate request. A CA that has archived a
+  backup copy of your encryption key has the potential capability of
+  decrypting any messages you receive that were encrypted with your
+  corresponding public key.</p>
+
+<p>You can take these actions from the Encryption Key Copy dialogue box:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View Certificate</strong>: To view the certificate identifying
+    the CA that is requesting the backup copy, click View Certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>OK</strong>: If you trust the CA identified by the CA certificate
+    to decrypt encrypted messages that you receive, click OK.
+
+    <p>If you are not sure whether to trust the CA that is requesting the
+      backup copy, talk to your system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Cancel</strong>: If you don&apos;t trust the CA that is
+    requesting the backup copy, don&apos;t request a certificate from it. Click
+    Cancel to stop both the backup procedure and the request for a
+    certificate.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>After your CA makes a backup copy of the encryption key, you will be able to
+  use that key to access your encrypted mail even if you lose your password or
+  lose your own copy of the key. If no backup copy of your encryption key
+  exists and you lose your password or the key, you will have no way of reading
+  email messages that were encrypted with that key.</p>
+
+<h2 id="certificate_backup">Certificate Backup</h2>
+
+<p>When you receive a certificate, make a backup copy of the certificate and
+  its private key, then store the copy in a safe place. For example, you can
+  put the copy on a floppy disc and store it with other valuable items under
+  lock and key. That way, even if you have hard disc or file corruption
+  problems, you can easily restore the certificate.</p>
+
+<p>It can be inconvenient, at best, and in some situations catastrophic to lose
+  your certificate and its associated private key, depending on what you use it
+  for. For example:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>If you lose a certificate that identifies you to important web sites, you
+    will not be able to access those web sites until you obtain a new
+    certificate. </li>
+  <li>If you lose a certificate used to encrypt email messages, you will not
+    be able to read any of your encrypted email&mdash;including both encrypted
+    messages that you have sent and encrypted messages that you have received.
+    In this case, if you cannot obtain a backup of the private encryption key
+    associated with the certificate, you will never be able to read any of the
+    messages encrypted with that key.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Like any other valuable data, certificates should be backed up to avoid
+  future trouble and expense. Do it now so you don&apos;t forget.</p>
+
+<h2 id="user_identification_request">User Identification Request</h2>
+
+<p>Some web sites require that you identify yourself with a certificate rather
+  than a name and password, because certificates provide a more reliable form
+  of identification. This method of identifying yourself over the Internet is
+  sometimes called
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#client_authentication">client authentication</a>.</p>
+
+<p>However, Certificate Manager may have more than one certificate on file that
+  can be used for the purposes of identifying yourself to a web site. In this
+  case, Certificate Manager presents the User Identification Request dialogue
+  box, which displays two kinds of information:</p>
+
+<p><strong>This site has requested that you identify yourself with a
+  certificate</strong>: This section of the dialogue box lists the following
+  information:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Host name</strong>: The name of the server requesting
+    identification, used as part of its URL. For example, the host name for the
+    Netscape web site is <tt>home.netscape.com</tt>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Organisation</strong>: The name of the organisation that runs the
+    web site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Issued under</strong>: The name of the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority (CA)</a>
+    that issued the certificate.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Choose a certificate to present as identification</strong>: The
+  certificates you have available for the purposes of identifying yourself to a
+  web site are listed in the drop-down list in this section of the dialogue box.
+  Choose the certificate that seems most likely to be recognised by the web site
+  you want to visit.</p>
+
+<p>To help you decide, the following details of the selected certificate are
+  displayed:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Issued to</strong>: Lists information about the person identified
+    by the certificate (for example, your name and email address) and the
+    certificate&apos;s serial number and validity dates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Issued by</strong>: Summarises information about the CA that
+    issued the certificate, such as its name, location, and state.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="new_certificate_authority">New Certificate Authority</h2>
+
+<p>The certificates that the Certificate Manager has on file, whether stored on
+  your computer or on an external security device such as a smart card, include
+  certificates that identify
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities (CAs)</a>.
+  To be able to recognise any other certificates it has on file, Certificate
+  Manager must have certificates for the CAs that issued or authorised issuance
+  of those certificates.</p>
+
+<p>When you decide to trust a CA, Certificate Manager downloads that CA&apos;s
+  certificate and can then recognise the kinds of certificates you trust that
+  CA to issue.</p>
+
+<p>Before downloading a new CA certificate, Certificate Manager allows you to
+  specify the purposes for which you trust the certificate, if at all. You can
+  select any of the following options:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify web sites</strong>: Web site certificates
+    for some sites, such as those that handle financial transactions, can be
+    extremely important, and inappropriate or false identification can have
+    negative consequences.</li>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify email users</strong>: If you intend to
+    send email users confidential information in encrypted form, or if accurate
+    identification of email users is important to you for any other reason, you
+    should consider carefully the CA&apos;s procedures for identifying
+    prospective certificate owners and whether they are appropriate for your
+    purposes before selecting this option.</li>
+  <li><strong>Trust this CA to identify software developers</strong>: Selecting
+    this option means that you trust the CA to issue certificates that identify
+    the origin of Java applets and JavaScript scripts requesting special access
+    to your computer, such as the ability to change files. Since such access
+    privileges can be misused, for example to destroy data stored on your hard
+    disc, be very careful about selecting this option unless you are certain
+    that you trust the CA for this purpose.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Before you decide to trust a new CA, make sure that you know who is
+  operating it. Make sure the CA&apos;s policies and procedures are
+  appropriate for the kinds of certificates it issues. For example, if the CA
+  issues certificates identifying web sites you use for financial transactions,
+  make sure you are comfortable with the level of assurance the CA
+  provides.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Click this button to view the CA certificate you
+    are about to download. If you decide you don&apos;t want to download this
+    certificate, click Cancel.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="web_site_certificates">Web site Certificates</h2>
+
+<p>When you attempt to go to a web site that supports the use of
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#ssl">SSL</a> for
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#authentication">authentication</a> and
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#encryption">encryption</a>, you may be faced with an
+  error page. There are two types, one called
+  <a href="#secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed</a> and one
+  called <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed
+      Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#secure_connection_failed_dialog">Secure Connection Failed
+      Dialog</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_expired">Server Certificate Expired</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#certificate_not_yet_valid">Server Certificate Not Yet
+      Valid</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="secure_connection_failed_page">Secure Connection Failed Page</h3>
+
+<p>In the case where you have disabled the SSL protocol (e.g. through
+  <a href="ssl_help.xhtml#ssl_settings">SSL Settings</a>) or the site that you
+  are accessing is using an older, insecure version of the SSL protocol then you
+  will be presented with a page titled &quot;Secure Connection Failed&quot;.
+  That page contains some basic background information (including the
+  <strong>Error code</strong> that uniquely identifies the type of problem
+  &brandShortName; detected with the site) and a <strong>Try Again</strong>
+  button that triggers a page reload.</p>
+
+<h3 id="untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection Page</h3>
+
+<p>If SSL itself is enabled then the error page that you will be presented with
+  will be titled &quot;This Connection is Untrusted&quot;. There are many
+  different reasons why a connection can appear untrusted. Here are some of the
+  most common ones:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>the certificate of the web site is <a href="#certificate_expired">no longer
+    valid (expired)</a></li>
+  <li>the certificate of the web site is
+    <a href="#certificate_not_yet_valid">not yet valid</a></li>
+  <li>the certificate of the web site is only valid for another site
+    (<a href="#domain_name_mismatch">domain name mismatch</a>)</li>
+  <li>the certificate of the web site is self-signed (thus the identity of the
+    web site cannot be verified).</li>
+  <li>the issuer certificate is not trusted (&brandShortName; cannot
+    verify the identity of the web site because it doesn&apos;t
+    recognise the <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate
+    authority (CA)</a> that issued the web site&apos;s certificate)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The page displayed in the above cases is meant to help you understand why
+  &brandShortName; was unable to establish a secure connection to the web site.
+  It starts by telling you that the site&apos;s identity could not be verified,
+  then offers you to leave the page by clicking the <strong>This sounds bad,
+  take me to my home page instead</strong> button. If you are unsure what to do
+  it is recommended that you follow this advice.</p>
+
+<p>If you want to know a little bit more about the actual problem at hand you
+  may expand the corresponding section by clicking the chevron in front of
+  <strong>Technical Details</strong>. That section also contains the
+  <strong>Error code</strong> that uniquely identifies the type of problem
+  &brandShortName; detected with the site.</p>
+
+<h4 id="add_security_exception">Adding a Security Exception</h4>
+
+<p>The <strong>I Understand the Risks</strong> section of the Untrusted
+  Connection page allows you to tell &brandShortName; to explicitly override the
+  security checks for this site by adding an exception. If you expand the
+  section by clicking the chevron in front of it you will see an <strong>Add
+  Exception</strong> button that will take you to a dialogue allowing you to get
+  and view the web site&apos;s certificate and optionally add a Security
+  Exception for it (either permanently or just for the current session). Those
+  exceptions can be administered through the Certificate Manager&apos;s
+  <a href="certs_help.xhtml#servers">Servers</a> tab.</p>
+
+<h3 id="secure_connection_failed_dialog">Secure Connection Failed Dialog</h3>
+
+<p>In cases where &brandShortName; cannot determine the actual cause of the
+  problem a dialogue titled &quot;Secure Connection Failed&quot; is shown in
+  addition to the <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">Untrusted Connection
+  page</a>. That dialogue includes a <strong>View Certificate</strong> button
+  that allows you to examine the web site&apos;s certificate more closely.</p>
+
+<h3 id="certificate_expired">Certificate Expired</h3>
+
+<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s licence, and many other forms of
+  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
+  valid for a specified period of time. When a certificate expires, the owner
+  of the certificate needs to get a new one.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a web site whose server certificate has expired. The first
+  thing you should do is make sure the time and date displayed by your computer
+  is correct. If your computer&apos;s clock is set to a date that is after the
+  expiration date, &brandShortName; treats the web site&apos;s certificate as
+  expired.</p>
+
+<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
+  about whether to trust the site. This decision depends on what you intend to
+  do at the site and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will
+  make sure that they replace their certificates before they expire. If you
+  choose to continue you need to <a href="#add_security_exception">add a
+  security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<h3 id="certificate_not_yet_valid">Certificate Not Yet Valid</h3>
+
+<p>Like a credit card, a driver&apos;s licence, and many other forms of
+  identification, a <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> is
+  valid for a specified period of time.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a web site whose server certificate&apos;s validity period has
+  not yet started. The first thing you should do is make sure the time and date
+  displayed by your own computer is correct. If your computer&apos;s clock is
+  set to the wrong date, &brandShortName; may treat the server certificate as
+  not yet valid even if this is not the case.</p>
+
+<p>If your computer&apos;s clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision
+  about whether to trust the site. This decision depends on what you intend to
+  do at the site and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will
+  make sure that the validity period for their certificates has begun before
+  beginning to use them. If you choose to continue you need to
+  <a href="#add_security_exception">add a security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<h3 id="domain_name_mismatch">Domain Name Mismatch</h3>
+
+<p>A server <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate">certificate</a> specifies the
+  name of the server in the form of the site&apos;s domain name. For example,
+  the domain name for the Mozilla web site is <tt>www.mozilla.org</tt>. If the
+  domain name in a server&apos;s certificate doesn&apos;t match the actual
+  domain name of the web site, it may be a sign that someone is attempting to
+  intercept your communication with the web site.</p>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; <a href="#untrusted_connection_page">warns</a> you when you
+  attempt to visit a web site whose server certificate&apos;s domain does not
+  match the domain of the web site you are trying to visit. The decision whether
+  to trust the site anyway depends on what you intend to do at the site and what
+  else you know about it. Most commercial sites will make sure that the host
+  name for a web site certificate matches the web site&apos;s actual host name.
+  If you choose to continue you need to <a href="#add_security_exception">add
+  a security exception</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you decide to accept the certificate anyway (either for this session or
+  permanently), you should be cautious about what you do on the web site, and you
+  should treat any information you find there as potentially suspect.</p>
+
+<p>&copyright.string;</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
--- a/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml
@@ -1,415 +1,421 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
-  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
-  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
-  %brandDTD;
-]>
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
-<head>
-<title>Certificate Manager</title>
-<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
-  type="text/css"/>
-</head>
-<body>
-
-<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
-  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
-  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
-  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
-  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
-  protection on the Internet.</div>
-
-<h1 id="certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</h1>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Certificate Manager. For more
-  information on using certificates, see <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml">Using
-  Certificates</a>.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Manager window, follow
-  these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
-    the list.)</li>
-  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#other_peoples_certificates">Other People&apos;s
-      Certificates</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#authorities">Authorities</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="your_certificates">Your Certificates</h2>
-
-<p>The Your Certificates tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
-  Manager</a> displays the certificates on file that identify you. Your
-  certificates are listed under the names of the organisations that issued
-  them:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
-    name, double-click the name.</li>
-  <li>To select a certificate, click its name.</li>
-  <li>To select more than one certificate, hold down the Control key and click
-    their names.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To perform the following actions, select one or more certificates and click
-  one of the following buttons:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
-    certificates.</li>
-  <li><strong>Backup</strong>: Initiate the process of saving the selected
-    certificates. A window appears that allows you to choose a password to
-    protect the backup. You can then save the backup in a directory of your
-    choice.</li>
-  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>These actions do not require a certificate to be selected:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
-    certificates that were previously backed up. When you click Import,
-    Certificate Manager first asks you to locate the file that contains the
-    backup. The names of certificate backup files typically end in
-    <tt>.p12</tt>; for example, <tt>MyCert.p12</tt>. After you select the file
-    to be imported, Certificate Manager asks you to enter the password that you
-    set when you backed up the certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>Backup All</strong>: Initiate the process of saving all the
-    certificates stored in the
-    <a href="glossary.xhtml#software_security_device">Software Security
-    Device</a>.
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Certificates on smart cards cannot be backed up.
-      Whether you select some of your certificates and click Backup, or click
-      Backup All, the resulting backup file will not include any certificates
-      stored on smart cards or other external security devices. You can only
-      back up certificates that are stored on the built-in Software Security
-      Device.</p>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="choose_a_certificate_backup_password">Choose a Certificate Backup
-  Password</h3>
-
-<p>A certificate backup password protects one or more certificates that you are
-  backing up from the <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in
-  the Certificate Manager.</p>
-
-<p>The Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when you back up
-  certificates, and requests it when you attempt to import certificates that
-  have previously been backed up.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Certificate backup password</strong>: Type your backup password
-    into this field.</li>
-  <li><strong>Certificate backup password (again)</strong>: Type your backup
-    password again. If you don&apos;t type it the second time exactly as you
-    did the first time, the OK button remains inactive. If this happens, try
-    typing the new password again.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>If someone obtains the file containing a certificate that you have backed up
-  and successfully imports the certificate, that person can send messages or
-  access web sites while pretending to be you. This can be a problem, for
-  example, if you digitally sign important email messages or manage your bank
-  or investment accounts over the Internet.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore, it&apos;s important to select a certificate backup password that
-  is difficult to guess. The <strong>password quality meter</strong> gives you
-  a rough idea of the quality of your password as you type it based on factors
-  such as length and the use of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers,
-  and symbols. It does not guarantee that your password cannot be guessed,
-  however.</p>
-
-<p>For further guidelines, see
-  <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#choosing_a_good_password">Choosing a Good
-  Password</a>.</p>
-
-<p>It&apos;s also important to record the password in a safe place&mdash;and
-  not anywhere that&apos;s easily accessible to someone else. If you forget
-  this password, you can&apos;t import the backup of your certificate.</p>
-
-<h3 id="delete_your_certificates">Delete Your Certificates</h3>
-
-<p>Before deleting one of your own expired certificates from the
-  <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in the Certificate
-  Manager, make sure you won&apos;t need it again some day for reading old
-  email messages that you may have encrypted with the corresponding private
-  key.</p>
-
-<h2 id="other_peoples_certificates">Other People&apos;s Certificates</h2>
-
-<p>The Other People&apos;s tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
-  Manager</a> displays email certificates you have on file that identify other
-  people.</p>
-
-<p>When people send you digitally signed email messages, Certificate Manager
-  imports their certificates automatically. You can use these certificates to
-  send encrypted messages to those people.</p>
-
-<p>Other people&apos;s certificates are listed under the names of the
-  organisations that issued them:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
-    name, double-click the name.</li>
-  <li>To select a certificate, click its name.</li>
-  <li>To select more than one certificate, hold down the Control key and click
-    their names.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To perform the following actions, select one or more certificates and click
-  one of the following buttons:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
-    certificates.</li>
-  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="delete_email_certificates">Delete Email Certificates</h3>
-
-<p>Before deleting someone else&apos;s certificate from the
-  <a href="#other_peoples_certificates">Other People&apos;s</a> tab in the
-  Certificate Manager, make sure you won&apos;t need it again some day to send
-  encrypted email to that person or to verify digital signatures on messages
-  from that person.</p>
-
-<h2 id="web_site_certificates">Website Certificates</h2>
-
-<p>The Websites tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have
-  on file that identify web sites.</p>
-
-<p>Website certificates are grouped under the names of the organisations that
-  issued them:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
-    name, double-click the name.</li>
-  <li>To select a certificate, click its name.</li>
-  <li>To select more than one certificate, hold down the Control key and click
-    their names.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To perform the following actions, select one or more certificates and click
-  one of the following buttons:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
-    certificates.</li>
-  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the trust settings that Certificate
-    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
-    settings to designate a web site certificate as one that you trust or
-    don&apos;t trust for identification purposes.</li>
-  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="edit_web_site_certificate_trust_settings">Edit Website Certificate
-  Trust Settings</h3>
-
-<p>When you select a web site certificate from the
-  <a href="#web_site_certificates">Websites</a> tab in the Certificate Manager
-  and click Edit, you see a window entitled <q>Edit web site certificate trust
-  settings</q>. Here you specify whether you want to trust the selected
-  certificate for identifying the web site and setting up an encrypted
-  connection.</p>
-
-<p>The dialogue box contains these elements:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>The certificate <q><em>name of certificate</em></q> was
-    issued by</strong>: Provides information about the
-    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
-    that issued this certificate.</li>
-  <li><strong>Edit certificate trust settings</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>: If you
-        select this option, Certificate Manager will henceforth trust this
-        certificate for the purposes of identifying this web site or setting up
-        an encrypted connection. If you select this option and then attempt to
-        visit the web site, your browser will access the site with few, if any,
-        warnings.</li>
-      <li><strong>Do not trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>:
-        If you select this option, Certificate Manager will no longer trust
-        this certificate for the purposes of identifying this web site or
-        setting up an encrypted connection. If you select this option and
-        then attempt to visit the web site, you will see one or more warning
-        messages before you can access the site.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Edit CA Trust</strong>: Click this button to specify trust
-    settings for the certificate authority (CA) that issued the web site
-    certificate. These settings allow you to trust or not to trust different
-    kinds of certificates issued by that certificate authority. For example,
-    you can choose to trust all web site certificates issued by the
-    authority.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>Click OK to confirm your choice.</p>
-
-<h3 id="delete_web_site_certificates">Delete Website Certificates</h3>
-
-<p>Before deleting a web site certificate from the
-  <a href="#web_site_certificates">Websites</a> tab in the Certificate
-  Manager, make sure that you won&apos;t need it again for the purposes of
-  identifying a web site and setting up an encrypted connection.</p>
-
-<h2 id="authorities">Authorities</h2>
-
-<p>The Authorities tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
-  Manager</a> displays the certificates you have on file that identify
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities
-  (CAs)</a>.</p>
-
-<p>CA certificates are grouped under the names of the organisations that issued
-  them:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>If you can&apos;t see CA certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
-    name, double-click the name.</li>
-  <li>To select a CA certificate, click its name.</li>
-  <li>To select more than one CA certificate, hold down the Control key and
-    click their names.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To perform these actions, select the certificates on which you want to act
-  and click one of these buttons:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
-    certificates.</li>
-  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the settings that Certificate
-    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
-    settings to designate what kinds of certificates, if any, you trust that
-    are issued by the corresponding CAs.</li>
-  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To ensure that an entire
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_chain">certificate chain</a> of CAs are
-  all trusted, you need to edit the root CA certifiate only.</p>
-
-<p>To import the chain, you click a link on a web page provided by the CA. You
-  can then use the authorities tab to locate the root certificate and edit its
-  trust settings.</p>
-
-<p>The root and intermediate CAs all appear under the same organisation. The
-  root certificate is the one that lists itself as the the issuer.</p>
-
-<p><strong>If you download an intermediate CA</strong>: If you download an
-  intermediate CA certificate that chains to a root certificate already marked
-  as trusted in your browser, you don&apos;t have to indicate what purposes you
-  trust it for. Intermediate certificates automatically inherit the trust
-  settings of their roots.</p>
-
-<h3 id="edit_ca_certificate_trust_settings">Edit CA Certificate Trust
-  Settings</h3>
-
-<p>When you select a CA certificate from the
-  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager and
-  click Edit, you see a window entitled <q>Edit CA certificate trust
-  settings</q>. Here you specify the kinds of certificates you trust this CA
-  to certify. If you deselect all the tickboxes, Certificate Manager will not
-  trust any certificates issued by this CA.</p>
-
-<p>The settings have these effects:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>This certificate can identify web sites</strong>: Certificate
-    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
-    identifying web sites and encrypting web site connections. If you deselect
-    this tickbox, Certificate Manager will not trust web site certificates
-    issued by this CA.</li>
-  <li><strong>This certificate can identify mail users</strong>: Certificate
-    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
-    signing or encrypting email. If you deselect this tickbox, Certificate
-    Manager will not trust email certificates issued by this CA.</li>
-  <li><strong>This certificate can identify software makers</strong>:
-    Certificate Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the
-    purpose of identifying software makers. If you deselect this tickbox,
-    Certificate Manager will not trust such certificates issued by this
-    CA.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>Click OK to confirm the settings you have selected.</p>
-
-<h3 id="delete_ca_certificates">Delete CA Certificates</h3>
-
-<p>Before deleting a CA certificate from the
-  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager,
-  make sure that you won&apos;t need it again to validate certificates issued
-  by that CA. If you delete the only valid certificate you have for a CA,
-  Certificate Manager will no longer trust any certificates issued by that
-  CA.</p>
-
-<h2 id="device_manager">Device Manager</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes the options available in the Device Manager window.
-  For background information and step-by-step instructions on the use of the
-  Device Manager, see
-  <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#managing_smart_cards_and_other_security_devices">Managing
-  Smart Cards and Other Security Devices</a>.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not currently viewing the Device Manager window, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
-    the list.)</li>
-  <li>In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Device Manager lists each available PKCS #11 module, and the security
-  devices managed by each module below the module&apos;s name.</p>
-
-<p>When you select a module or device, information about the selected item
-  appears in the middle of the window, and some of the buttons on the right
-  side of the window become available. In general, you perform an action on
-  a module or device by selecting its name and clicking the appropriate
-  button:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Log In</strong>: Log into the selected security device. After you
-    have logged in to the device, the frequency with which you will be asked to
-    enter the master password for the device depends on the
-    <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#master_password_timeout">Master Password
-    Timeout</a> settings.</li>
-  <li><strong>Log Out</strong>: Log out of the selected security device. After
-    you have logged out of the device, the device and the certificates it
-    contains will not be available until you log in again.</li>
-  <li><strong>Change Password</strong>: Change the master password for the
-    selected security device.</li>
-  <li><strong>Load</strong>: Displays a dialogue box that allows you to specify
-    the name and location of a new PKCS #11 module. Before adding a new module,
-    you should first install the module software on your computer and if
-    necessary connect any associated hardware device. Follow the instructions
-    provided by the vendor.</li>
-  <li><strong>Unload</strong>: Unload the selected module. If you unload a
-    module, both the module and its security devices are no longer available
-    for use by the browser.</li>
-  <li><strong>Enable FIPS</strong>: Turns the FIPS mode on and off. For more
-    information, see
-    <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#enable_fips_mode">Enable FIPS
-    Mode</a>.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>&copyright.string;</p>
-
-</body>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Certificate Manager</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div class="boilerPlate">This document is provided for your information only.
+  It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of
+  your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however,
+  address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a
+  recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security
+  protection on the Internet.</div>
+
+<h1 id="certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Certificate Manager. For more
+  information on using certificates, see <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml">Using
+  Certificates</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Manager window, follow
+  these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>Click Manage Certificates.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#people">People</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#servers">Servers</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#authorities">Authorities</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#others">Others</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="your_certificates">Your Certificates</h2>
+
+<p>The Your Certificates tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</a> displays the certificates on file that identify you. Your
+  certificates are listed under the names of the organisations that issued
+  them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
+  name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Backup</strong>: Initiate the process of saving the selected
+    certificates. A window appears that allows you to choose a password to
+    protect the backup. You can then save the backup in a directory of your
+    choice.</li>
+  <li><strong>Backup All</strong>: Initiate the process of saving all the
+    certificates stored in the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#software_security_device">Software Security
+    Device</a>.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Certificates on smart cards cannot be backed up.
+      Whether you select some of your certificates and click Backup, or click
+      Backup All, the resulting backup file will not include any certificates
+      stored on smart cards or other external security devices. You can only
+      back up certificates that are stored on the built-in Software Security
+      Device.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates that were previously backed up. When you click Import,
+    Certificate Manager first asks you to locate the file that contains the
+    backup. The names of certificate backup files typically end in
+    <tt>.p12</tt>; for example, <tt>MyCert.p12</tt>. After you select the file
+    to be imported, Certificate Manager asks you to enter the password that you
+    set when you backed up the certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="choose_a_certificate_backup_password">Choose a Certificate Backup
+  Password</h3>
+
+<p>A certificate backup password protects one or more certificates that you are
+  backing up from the <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in
+  the Certificate Manager.</p>
+
+<p>The Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when you back up
+  certificates, and requests it when you attempt to import certificates that
+  have previously been backed up.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Certificate backup password</strong>: Type your backup password
+    into this field.</li>
+  <li><strong>Certificate backup password (again)</strong>: Type your backup
+    password again. If you don&apos;t type it the second time exactly as you
+    did the first time, the OK button remains inactive. If this happens, try
+    typing the new password again.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>If someone obtains the file containing a certificate that you have backed up
+  and successfully imports the certificate, that person can send messages or
+  access web sites while pretending to be you. This can be a problem, for
+  example, if you digitally sign important email messages or manage your bank
+  or investment accounts over the Internet.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore, it&apos;s important to select a certificate backup password that
+  is difficult to guess. The <strong>password quality meter</strong> gives you
+  a rough idea of the quality of your password as you type it based on factors
+  such as length and the use of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers,
+  and symbols. It does not guarantee that your password cannot be guessed,
+  however.</p>
+
+<p>For further guidelines, see
+  <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#choosing_a_good_password">Choosing a Good
+  Password</a>.</p>
+
+<p>It&apos;s also important to record the password in a safe place&mdash;and
+  not anywhere that&apos;s easily accessible to someone else. If you forget
+  this password, you can&apos;t import the backup of your certificate.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_your_certificates">Delete Your Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting one of your own expired certificates from the
+  <a href="#your_certificates">Your Certificates</a> tab in the Certificate
+  Manager, make sure you won&apos;t need it again some day for reading old
+  email messages that you may have encrypted with the corresponding private
+  key.</p>
+
+<h2 id="people">People</h2>
+
+<p>The People tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate Manager</a>
+  displays email certificates you have on file that identify other people.</p>
+
+<p>When people send you digitally signed email messages, Certificate Manager
+  imports their certificates automatically. You can use these certificates to
+  send encrypted messages to those people.</p>
+
+<p>Certificates that identify people are listed under the names of the
+  organisations that issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under
+  an organisation&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the trust settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate an email certificate as one that you trust or
+    don&apos;t trust for identification purposes.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="delete_email_certificates">Delete Email Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting someone else&apos;s certificate from the
+  <a href="#people">People</a> tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure you
+  won&apos;t need it again some day to send encrypted email to that person or
+  to verify digital signatures on messages from that person.</p>
+
+<h2 id="servers">Servers</h2>
+
+<p>The Servers tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have
+  on file that identify servers (web sites, mail servers).</p>
+
+<p>Certificates that identify servers are grouped under the names of the
+  organisations that issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under
+  an organisation&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the trust settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate a web site certificate as one that you trust or
+    don&apos;t trust for identification purposes.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Add Exception</strong>: Add a security exception for a server
+    (web site, mail server) that identifies itself with invalid information.
+    This is an advanced feature, act with caution.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="edit_web_site_certificate_trust_settings">Edit Website Certificate
+  Trust Settings</h3>
+
+<p>When you select a web site certificate from the
+  <a href="#servers">Servers</a> tab in the Certificate Manager and click Edit,
+  you see a window entitled <q>Edit web site certificate trust settings</q>.
+  Here you specify whether you want to trust the selected certificate for
+  identifying the web site and setting up an encrypted connection.</p>
+
+<p>The dialogue box contains these elements:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>The certificate <q><em>name of certificate</em></q> was
+    issued by</strong>: Provides information about the
+    <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authority</a>
+    that issued this certificate.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit certificate trust settings</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>: If you
+        select this option, Certificate Manager will henceforth trust this
+        certificate for the purposes of identifying this web site or setting up
+        an encrypted connection. If you select this option and then attempt to
+        visit the web site, your browser will access the site with few, if any,
+        warnings.</li>
+      <li><strong>Do not trust the authenticity of this certificate</strong>:
+        If you select this option, Certificate Manager will no longer trust
+        this certificate for the purposes of identifying this web site or
+        setting up an encrypted connection. If you select this option and
+        then attempt to visit the web site, you will see one or more warning
+        messages before you can access the site.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Edit CA Trust</strong>: Click this button to specify trust
+    settings for the certificate authority (CA) that issued the web site
+    certificate. These settings allow you to trust or not to trust different
+    kinds of certificates issued by that certificate authority. For example,
+    you can choose to trust all web site certificates issued by the
+    authority.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Click OK to confirm your choice.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_web_site_certificates">Delete Website Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting a server certificate from the
+  <a href="#servers">Servers</a> tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure that
+  you won&apos;t need it again for the purposes of identifying a web site or
+  mail server and setting up an encrypted connection.</p>
+
+<h2 id="authorities">Authorities</h2>
+
+<p>The Authorities tab in the <a href="#certificate_manager">Certificate
+  Manager</a> displays the certificates you have on file that identify
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_authority">certificate authorities
+  (CAs)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>CA certificates are grouped under the names of the organisations that issued
+  them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an organisation&apos;s
+  name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions
+  require one or more certificates to be selected):</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Edit</strong>: View or change the settings that Certificate
+    Manager associates with the selected certificates. You can use these
+    settings to designate what kinds of certificates, if any, you trust that
+    are issued by the corresponding CAs.</li>
+  <li><strong>Import</strong>: Import a file containing one or more
+    certificates. When you click Import, Certificate Manager first asks you
+    to locate the file that contains the certificate(s).</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To ensure that an entire
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#certificate_chain">certificate chain</a> of CAs are
+  all trusted, you need to edit the root CA certifiate only.</p>
+
+<p>To import the chain, you click a link on a web page provided by the CA. You
+  can then use the authorities tab to locate the root certificate and edit its
+  trust settings.</p>
+
+<p>The root and intermediate CAs all appear under the same organisation. The
+  root certificate is the one that lists itself as the issuer.</p>
+
+<p><strong>If you download an intermediate CA</strong>: If you download an
+  intermediate CA certificate that chains to a root certificate already marked
+  as trusted in your browser, you don&apos;t have to indicate what purposes you
+  trust it for. Intermediate certificates automatically inherit the trust
+  settings of their roots.</p>
+
+<h3 id="edit_ca_certificate_trust_settings">Edit CA Certificate Trust
+  Settings</h3>
+
+<p>When you select a CA certificate from the
+  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager and
+  click Edit, you see a window entitled <q>Edit CA certificate trust
+  settings</q>. Here you specify the kinds of certificates you trust this CA
+  to certify. If you deselect all the tickboxes, Certificate Manager will not
+  trust any certificates issued by this CA.</p>
+
+<p>The settings have these effects:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify web sites</strong>: Certificate
+    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
+    identifying web sites and encrypting web site connections. If you deselect
+    this tickbox, Certificate Manager will not trust web site certificates
+    issued by this CA.</li>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify mail users</strong>: Certificate
+    Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the purpose of
+    signing or encrypting email. If you deselect this tickbox, Certificate
+    Manager will not trust email certificates issued by this CA.</li>
+  <li><strong>This certificate can identify software makers</strong>:
+    Certificate Manager will trust certificates issued by this CA for the
+    purpose of identifying software makers. If you deselect this tickbox,
+    Certificate Manager will not trust such certificates issued by this
+    CA.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Click OK to confirm the settings you have selected.</p>
+
+<h3 id="delete_ca_certificates">Delete CA Certificates</h3>
+
+<p>Before deleting a CA certificate from the
+  <a href="#authorities">Authorities</a> tab in the Certificate Manager,
+  make sure that you won&apos;t need it again to validate certificates issued
+  by that CA. If you delete the only valid certificate you have for a CA,
+  Certificate Manager will no longer trust any certificates issued by that
+  CA.</p>
+
+<h2 id="others">Others</h2>
+
+<p>The Others tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have
+  on file that do not fit in any of the other categories, i.e. certificates
+  that neither belong to you, other people, servers or CAs.</p>
+
+<p>Other certificates are grouped under the names of the organisations that
+  issued them. If you can&apos;t see certificate names under an
+  organisation&apos;s name, double-click the name to expand it.</p>
+
+<p>Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>View</strong>: Display detailed information about the selected
+    certificates.</li>
+  <li><strong>Export</strong>: Export the selected certificates. You can
+    choose among various formats.</li>
+  <li><strong>Delete</strong>: Delete the selected certificates.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h2 id="device_manager">Device Manager</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes the options available in the Device Manager window.
+  For background information and step-by-step instructions on the use of the
+  Device Manager, see
+  <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#managing_smart_cards_and_other_security_devices">Managing
+  Smart Cards and Other Security Devices</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Device Manager window, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Privacy &amp; Security category, click Certificates. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy &amp; Security to expand
+    the list.)</li>
+  <li>In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Device Manager lists each available PKCS #11 module, and the security
+  devices managed by each module below the module&apos;s name.</p>
+
+<p>When you select a module or device, information about the selected item
+  appears in the middle of the window, and some of the buttons on the right
+  side of the window become available. In general, you perform an action on
+  a module or device by selecting its name and clicking the appropriate
+  button:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Log In</strong>: Log into the selected security device. After you
+    have logged in to the device, the frequency with which you will be asked to
+    enter the master password for the device depends on the
+    <a href="passwords_help.xhtml#master_password_timeout">Master Password
+    Timeout</a> settings.</li>
+  <li><strong>Log Out</strong>: Log out of the selected security device. After
+    you have logged out of the device, the device and the certificates it
+    contains will not be available until you log in again.</li>
+  <li><strong>Change Password</strong>: Change the master password for the
+    selected security device.</li>
+  <li><strong>Load</strong>: Displays a dialogue box that allows you to specify
+    the name and location of a new PKCS #11 module. Before adding a new module,
+    you should first install the module software on your computer and if
+    necessary connect any associated hardware device. Follow the instructions
+    provided by the vendor.</li>
+  <li><strong>Unload</strong>: Unload the selected module. If you unload a
+    module, both the module and its security devices are no longer available
+    for use by the browser.</li>
+  <li><strong>Enable FIPS</strong>: Turns the FIPS mode on and off. For more
+    information, see
+    <a href="using_certs_help.xhtml#enable_fips_mode">Enable FIPS
+    Mode</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>&copyright.string;</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
--- a/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml
@@ -1,2499 +1,2496 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
-  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
-  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
-  %brandDTD;
-]>
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
-<head>
-<title>Creating Web Pages with &brandShortName; Composer</title>
-<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
-  type="text/css"/>
-</head>
-<body>
-
-<h1 id="creating_web_pages_with_mozilla_composer">Creating Web Pages with
-  &brandShortName; Composer</h1>
-
-<p>&brandShortName; Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish
-  them on the web. You don&apos;t have to know HTML to use Composer; it is as
-  easy to use as a word processor.</p>
-
-<p>Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to other pages,
-  colours, and font styles. You can see what your document will look like on
-  the Web as you create it, and you can easily share your document with
-  other users, no matter what type of browser or HTML-capable email program
-  they use.</p>
-
-<p>To start using &brandShortName; Composer:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click the Composer icon in the lower-left corner of any
-    &brandShortName; window.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<div><img src="images/composer_icon.png" width="128" height="23"
-  alt="" /></div>
-<div style="-moz-margin-start: 80px;"><strong>Composer icon</strong></div>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#starting_a_new_page">Starting a New Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web
-      Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to
-      Your Web Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in
-      Composer</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on
-      the Web</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h1 id="starting_a_new_page" style="margin-top: 50px;">Starting a New Page</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your
-      New Page</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</h2>
-
-<p>&brandShortName; Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that
-  allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a <em>WYSIWYG</em> (What
-  You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look
-  to the reader as you&apos;re creating it. It is not necessary for you to know
-  HTML, since most of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from
-  the toolbars and menus.</p>
-
-<p>Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view or edit the
-  HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the
-  &lt;HTML&gt; Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the
-  Composer window.</p>
-
-<p>To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once
-  you&apos;ve started a page, you can add and edit text just as you would
-  in a word processor.</p>
-
-<p><strong>To create a new page from the browser</strong>:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Open the File menu, choose New, and then Composer Page. A Composer
-    window containing a blank page opens.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>To edit a page you&apos;re currently viewing in the
-  browser</strong>:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>In the browser window of the page you&apos;re viewing, open the File
-    menu and choose Edit Page. You see a Composer window that contains the
-    page you&apos;re viewing.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>To create a new page in Composer</strong>:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click the New button in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive</strong>:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer
-    window.</li>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File
-    dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.</li>
-  <li>Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>To edit a web page</strong>:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Browser.</li>
-  <li>Go to a web page: type the URL of the page (for example,
-    <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>) in the Location Bar and press
-    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>.</li>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most
-  recent file you&apos;ve been working on by opening the File menu, choosing
-  Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from the list.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your New
-  Page</h2>
-
-<p>You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. Saving a
-  document in HTML format preserves the document&apos;s formatting, such
-  as text styles (for example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images.
-  Saving a document in text-only format removes all the HTML tags but
-  preserves the document&apos;s text.</p>
-
-<p>To save a document as an HTML file:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Save or click the Save button on the
-    Composition toolbar.
-
-    <p>If you haven&apos;t already given your page a title, Composer prompts
-      you to do so. Composer displays the page title in the browser
-      window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in the browser. The
-      document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of bookmarks
-      if you bookmark the page.</p>
-
-    <p>Composer then prompts you to enter a filename and specify the location
-      where you want to save the file. Make sure you preserve the .html
-      extension in the filename.</p>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Choose Save As and select a different filename or location.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the HTML, images
-  and other files, such as sound files and style sheets), are saved locally
-  on your hard drive. If you only want to save the HTML part of the page, you
-  must change the Composer preference for saving pages. See
-  <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</a> for more information
-  on changing Composer&apos;s setting for saving pages.</p>
-
-<p>If an image location is absolute (starts with <q>http://</q>) and you are
-  connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the document in
-  Composer and the browser. However, if the image location is relative to the
-  page location (starts with <q>file:///</q>), then you won&apos;t see the
-  image in the local version of the document.</p>
-
-<p>To save a document as a text-only file:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.</li>
-  <li>Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the
-    file.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: Images do not appear in documents saved in the
-  text-only format.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File
-  menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in which
-  you&apos;re working. Keep in mind that your current changes will be lost.</p>
-
-<p>To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Browse Page (or click Browse in the
-    Composition toolbar). If you have not yet saved your document, Composer
-    prompts you to enter a page title, filename, and location. The Composer
-    window remains open behind the new browser window.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting
-      Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#working_with_lists">Working with Lists</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Colour,
-      Style, and Font</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or
-      Discontinuing Text Styles</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing
-      Text</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal
-      Lines</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special
-      Characters</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML
-      Elements and Attributes</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing
-      Mode</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting Paragraphs,
-  Headings, and Lists</h2>
-
-<p>To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to begin,
-    or select the text you want to format.</li>
-  <li>Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Body Text</strong>: Applies the application default font and
-        style for regular text, without affecting the spacing before or after
-        the text.</li>
-      <li><strong>Paragraph</strong>: Inserts a paragraph tag (use this to
-        begin a new paragraph). The paragraph includes top and bottom
-        margins.</li>
-      <li><strong>Heading 1</strong> - <strong>Heading 6</strong>: Formats the
-        paragraph as a heading. Heading 1 is the highest-level heading, while
-        Heading 6 is the lowest-level heading.</li>
-      <li><strong>Address</strong>: Can be used for a web page <q>signature</q>
-        that indicates the author of the page and the person to contact for
-        more information, for example: <tt>user@example.com</tt> 
-
-        <p>You might want to include the date and a copyright notice. This
-          format usually appears at the bottom of the web page under a
-          horizontal line. The browser displays the address format in
-          italics.</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Preformat</strong>: This is useful for elements such as code
-        examples, column data, and mail messages that you want displayed in a
-        fixed-width font. In normal text, most browsers remove extra spaces,
-        tabs, and paragraph returns. However, text that uses the Preformatted
-        style is displayed with the white space intact, preserving the layout
-        of the original text.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To format text as a heading:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you
-    want to format.</li>
-  <li>Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of
-    heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose <q>Heading 1</q>
-    for your main heading, <q>Heading 2</q> for the next level, and so
-    forth.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To apply a list item format:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want
-    to format.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List.</li>
-  <li>Choose the list style:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Bulleted</strong>: Each item has a bullet (dot) next to it
-        (as in this list).</li>
-      <li><strong>Numbered</strong>: Items are numbered.</li>
-      <li><strong>Term</strong> and <strong>Definition</strong>: These two
-        styles work together, creating a glossary-style appearance. Use the
-        Term tag for the word being defined, and the Definition tag for the
-        definition. The Term text appears flush left, and the Definition
-        text appears indented.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of
-  text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List
-  <img src="images/numbers.gif" width="21" height="21" alt="" />
-  or Bulleted List
-  <img src="images/bullets.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" />
-  buttons on the Format toolbar.</p>
-
-<p>To change the style of bullets or numbers:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you
-    want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to
-    apply a new style to the entire list.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.</li>
-  <li>Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered
-    lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can
-    change the bullet style.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can also double-click on a bullet or number in a
-  list to display the List Properties dialogue box.</p>
-
-<p>To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centering or
-  aligning to the left or right:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text
-    you want to align.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment
-    option.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: You can also use the Format toolbar to align
-  text.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="working_with_lists">Working with Lists</h2>
-
-<p>To end a list and continue typing body text:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the end of the last list item and
-    press <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> twice to
-    end the list.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To change one or more list items to body text:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the
-    list items.</li>
-  <li>In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted
-    list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To position indented text below a list item:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item.</li>
-  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
-    class="noMac">Enter</kbd>to create the hanging indent.</li>
-  <li>Type the text you want to indent.</li>
-  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
-    class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create another indented paragraph, or press
-    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create the
-    next list item.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list
-  items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the Indent or
-  Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, click anywhere in a
-  list item and press <kbd>Tab</kbd> to indent one level. Press
-  <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> to outdent one level.</p>
-
-<p>To merge two adjacent lists:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of
-    the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists
-    will also become part of the merged list.</li>
-  <li>Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar to
-    merge the lists.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Colour, Style, and
-  Font</h2>
-
-<p>To change the style, colour, or font of selected text:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the text you want to format.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Font</strong>: Use this to choose a font. If you prefer to
-        use fonts specified by the reader&apos;s browser, select Variable
-        Width or Fixed Width.
-
-        <p><strong>Note</strong>: The fonts Helvetica, Arial, Times, and
-          Courier generally look the same when viewed on different computers.
-          If you select a different font, it may not look the same when viewed
-          using a different computer.</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to choose a <em>relative</em> font
-        size or select an option to increase or decrease text size (relative
-        to the surrounding text).</li>
-      <li><strong>Text Style</strong>: Use this to select a style, such as
-        italic, bold, or underline, or to apply a structured style, for
-        example, Code.</li>
-      <li><strong>Text Colour</strong>: Use this to choose a colour from the
-        colour picker. If you are familiar with HTML hexadecimal colour codes,
-        you can type a specific code or you can just type a colour name (for
-        example, <q>blue</q>). You&apos;ll find the official W3C list of CSS
-        supported colour names
-        <a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#color-units">here</a>,
-        and another list of commonly supported colour names 
-        <a href="http://www.w3schools.com/html/html_colornames.asp">here</a>.
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To change the background colour of the page:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click anywhere in the page.</li>
-  <li>Click the background colour block in the Format toolbar.</li>
-  <li>Choose a background colour from the Block Background Colour dialogue
-    box.</li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly change the colour of text to the colour
-  last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text colour
-  block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to use one
-  colour for separate lines of text.</p>
-
-<p>You can also use an image as a background. See
-  <a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
-  Backgrounds</a>.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or Discontinuing Text
-  Styles</h2>
-
-<p>To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the text.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.</li>
-  <li>Continue typing.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To continue typing text with all text styles removed:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text
-    styles.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.</li>
-  <li>Continue typing.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing Text</h2>
-
-<p>To find text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
-    search.</li>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
-    Replace dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Type the text you want to locate in the <q>Find what</q> field. To narrow
-    the search, tick one or more of the following options:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
-        the search is for case-sensitive text.</li>
-      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
-        page and then start again from the top or bottom, depending on whether
-        you are searching forward or backwards.</li>
-      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search back from the
-        insertion point to the beginning of the page.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first
-    occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the next
-    occurrence.</li>
-  <li>Click Close when you have finished.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To find and replace text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
-    search.</li>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
-    Replace dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement text.</li>
-  <li>To narrow the search, tick one or more of the following options:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
-        the search is for case-sensitive text. If you don&apos;t select this
-        option, the search will find matching text in both upper and lower
-        case.</li>
-      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
-        page and then start again from the top.</li>
-      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search from the end
-        to the beginning of the page.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the
-    next occurrence of the text.</li>
-  <li>Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text.
-    Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find the next
-    occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document
-    with the replacement text.</li>
-  <li>Click Close when you have finished.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal Lines</h2>
-
-<p>Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different sections of a
-  document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also called a <em>rule</em>)
-  in your page, begin from the Composer window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to
-    appear.</li>
-  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<h3 id="setting_horizontal_line_properties">Setting Horizontal Line
-  Properties</h3>
-
-<p>You can customise a line&apos;s height, length, width, alignment, and
-  shading.</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialogue
-    box.</li>
-  <li>Edit any of these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Width</strong>: Enter the width and then choose <q>% of
-        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage,
-        the line&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s
-        or browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
-      <li><strong>Height</strong>: Type a number for the line&apos;s height
-        (in pixels).</li>
-      <li><strong>3-D Shading</strong>: Select this to add depth to the line
-        by adding a bevel shading.</li>
-      <li><strong>Alignment</strong>: Specify where you want to place the
-        line (left, centre, or right).</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time
-    you insert a horizontal line.</li>
-  <li>To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click Advanced
-    Edit. See the section,
-    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>,
-    for details.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can select <q>HTML Tags</q> from the View menu to
-  show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to select
-  everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any yellow box to
-  display the
-  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>
-  dialogue box for that HTML tag or element.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special Characters</h2>
-
-<p>To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency
-  symbols:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character
-    to appear.</li>
-  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the
-    Insert Character dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Select a category of characters.
-    <ul>
-      <li>If you choose Accent Uppercase or Accent Lowercase, then open the
-        Letter drop-down list and select the letter you wish to apply an
-        accent to. (Note: not all letters have accented forms.) Select
-        Common Symbols to insert special characters such as copyright symbols
-        or fractions.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to
-    insert.</li>
-  <li>Click Insert. 
-
-    <p>You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window)
-      while you keep this dialogue box open, in case you want to use it
-      again.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Close when you have finished inserting special characters.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML Elements and
-  Attributes</h2>
-
-<p>If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert
-  additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are
-  not sure how to work with HTML source code, it&apos;s best not to change it.
-  To work with HTML code, use one of these methods:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to insert the HTML code, or
-    select the text you want to edit, and then open the Insert menu and choose
-    HTML. In the Insert HTML dialogue box, enter HTML tags and text, and then
-    click Insert.</li>
-  <li>Select an element such as a table, named anchor, image, link, or
-    horizontal line. Double-click the element to open the associated properties
-    dialogue box for that item. Click Advanced Edit to open the Advanced Property
-    Editor. You can use the Advanced Property Editor to add HTML attributes,
-    JavaScript, and CSS to objects.</li>
-  <li>Open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the &lt;HTML&gt;
-    Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the Composer window.
-    (If you don&apos;t see the Edit Mode toolbar, open the View menu and choose
-    Show/Hide; then make sure the Edit Mode Toolbar is ticked.)</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="using_the_advanced_property_editor">Using the Advanced Property
-  Editor</h3>
-
-<p>To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images,
-  and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or
-  modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it&apos;s best not to do
-  so.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialogue box,
-  follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose HTML Tags.</li>
-  <li>Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Properties
-    dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Click Advanced Edit to open the object&apos;s Advanced Property Editor.
-    The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which lists the
-    current properties for the selected object:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>HTML Attributes</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
-        additional HTML attributes.</li>
-      <li><strong>Inline Style</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
-        additional CSS (cascading style sheet) properties through the
-        &lt;style&gt; attribute. For more information on using CSS styles
-        in Composer, see
-        <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences -Composer</a>.</li>
-      <li><strong>JavaScript Events</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
-        JavaScript events.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, select the
-    attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute&apos;s name
-    or value using the editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of
-    the dialogue box. To add a new attribute, type it in the Attribute field
-    at the bottom of the dialogue box. The new attribute is automatically added
-    when you click in the Value field. To remove an attribute, select it in
-    the list, and click Remove Attribute.
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Required attributes are highlighted in the
-      Attribute list.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialogue
-    box.</li>
-  <li>Click OK again to exit the Properties dialogue box.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</h2>
-
-<p>Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you
-  should first check the document&apos;s HTML formatting to make sure it
-  conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less
-  likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually
-  checking your web pages in the browser doesn&apos;t ensure that your document
-  will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers.</p>
-
-<p>Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document
-  conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses
-  the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document&apos;s HTML
-  syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. This service also provides
-  information on how to correct errors.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: You must be connected to the Internet to use this
-  feature.</p>
-
-<p>To validate your document&apos;s HTML syntax:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved
-    changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.</li>
-  <li>When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click <q>Browse</q>
-    and locate the file on your hard disc that you want to validate.</li>
-  <li>Click <q>Check</q>.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing Mode</h2>
-
-<p>Typically, you won&apos;t need to change the editing mode from the default
-  (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document&apos;s HTML source
-  code, you may want to change editing modes.</p>
-
-<p>Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes or views.
-  Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your document, but
-  displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons).</p>
-
-<p>Before you choose an editing mode:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then make sure there is a
-    tickmark next to Edit Mode Toolbar.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Normal</strong>: Choose this editing mode to see how the document
-    will look online while you are creating it. Choose this mode to
-    show table borders and named anchor icons. All other HTML tag icons
-    are hidden.</li>
-  <li><strong>HTML Tags</strong>: Choose this mode to show all HTML tag
-    icons.</li>
-  <li><strong>&lt;HTML&gt; Source</strong>: Choose this mode to view and edit
-    the document as unformatted HTML source code. When you save the
-    document, the Normal mode reappears.</li>
-  <li><strong>Preview</strong>: Choose this mode to display and edit the
-    document exactly as it would appear in a browser window, except
-    that links and JavaScript functions will not be active.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: JavaScript functions, frames, links, Java,
-  embedded objects and animated GIF files are not active in any of
-  the editing modes. To display these items in their active
-  state, click the Browse button on the Composition toolbar to
-  load the page into a browser window.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web Page</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
-      Properties</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and
-      Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and
-      Deleting Tables</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a
-      Table</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</h2>
-
-<p>Tables are useful for organising text, pictures, and data into formatted
-  rows and columns. To insert a table:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.</li>
-  <li>Click the Table button
-    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
-    Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialogue box appears.</li>
-  <li>Type the number of rows and columns you want.
-    <ul>
-      <li>(Optional) Enter a size for the table width, and select either
-        percentage of the window or pixels.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no
-    border.
-  
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate
-      tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
-      is viewed in a browser.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit
-    to display the
-    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To change additional properties for your new table, see
-  <a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
-  Properties</a>.
-</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a table within a table, open the
-  Insert menu and choose Table.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s Properties</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire
-  table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If
-  you are not currently viewing the Table Properties dialogue box, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.</li>
-  <li>Click the Table button
-    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
-    toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table
-    Properties dialogue box contains two tabs: Table and Cells.</li>
-  <li>Click the Table tab to edit these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to specify the number of rows and
-        columns. Enter the width of the table and then choose <q>% of
-        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage, the
-        table&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s or
-        browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
-      <li><strong>Borders and Spacing</strong>: Use this to specify, in pixels,
-        the border line width, the space between cells, and the cell padding
-        (the space between the contents of the cell and its border).
-
-        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a dotted outline to display
-          tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
-          is viewed in a browser.</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Table Alignment</strong>: Use this to align the table within
-        the page. Choose an option from the drop-down list.</li>
-      <li><strong>Caption</strong>: Choose the caption placement from the
-        drop-down list.</li>
-      <li><strong>Background Colour</strong>: Use this to choose a colour for
-        the table background, or leave it as transparent.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
-    to display the <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced
-    Property Editor</a>.
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialogue box, or
-    click OK to confirm them.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose
-    Table Properties. The Table Properties dialogue box appears.</li>
-  <li>Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Selection</strong>: Choose Cell, Row, or Column from the
-        drop-down list. Click Previous or Next to move through rows, columns,
-        or cells.</li>
-      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Type a number for Height and Width, and then
-        choose <q>% of table</q> or <q>pixels</q>.</li>
-      <li><strong>Content Alignment</strong>: Select a vertical and horizontal
-        alignment type for the text or data inside each cell.</li>
-      <li><strong>Cell Style</strong>: Select Header from the drop-down list
-        for column or row headers (which centers and bolds the text in the
-        cell); otherwise choose Normal.</li>
-      <li><strong>Text Wrap</strong>: Select <q>Don&apos;t wrap</q> from the
-        drop-down list to keep text from wrapping to the next line unless you
-        insert a paragraph break. Otherwise, choose Wrap.</li>
-      <li><strong>Background Colour</strong>: Select a colour for the cell
-        background or leave it as transparent.
-
-        <p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript
-          events, click Advanced Edit to display the
-          <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
-          Editor</a>
-        </p>
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialogue box, or
-    click OK to confirm them.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the text colour or background colour of one
-  or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click
-  anywhere in the table and then click the text colour or background colour
-  icon in the Format toolbar.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the colour of cells to the colour last used,
-  select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background colour picker.
-  This is useful when you want to use one colour for individual cells.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and Deleting Rows,
-  Columns, and Cells</h2>
-
-<p>Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, columns,
-  or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that allow you to
-  maintain the original rectangular structure or layout of the table while
-  you perform editing tasks.</p>
-
-<p>To add a cell, row, or column to your table:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).</li>
-  <li>Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.</li>
-  <li>Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table
-    within a table cell.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To delete a cell, row, or column:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or,
-    select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To
-    select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select.
-    To select individual cells in a table, hold down the
-    <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> key and click
-    on the cells you want to select.</li>
-  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Delete.</li>
-  <li>Choose the item you want to delete.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click inside the cell on the left, open the Table menu, and
-    choose Join with Cell to the Right.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To join (or merge) adjacent cells:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Select adjacent cells by dragging over them.</li>
-  <li>Open the Table menu, and choose Join Selected Cells.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click inside the joined cell, open the Table menu, and then
-    choose Split Cell. Composer puts the entire contents of the joined
-    cell into the first of the two cells.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>Refer to <a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a>
-  for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and
-  columns.</p>
-
-<h3 id="changing_the_default_table_editing_behavior">Changing the Default Table
-  Editing Behaviour</h3>
-
-<p>By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the
-  table&apos;s structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever
-  needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells but still maintain
-  the table&apos;s original rectangular layout, or structure. Otherwise,
-  deleting cells can result in a table with empty spaces, or whose outline
-  appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells.</p>
-
-<p>To change the default table editing behaviour, begin from the Composer
-  window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu, choose Preferences, and then choose
-    Composer.</li>
-  <li>Under Editing, set the following preference:
-    <ul>
-      <li>Make sure that <q>Maintain table layout when inserting or
-        deleting cells</q> is ticked to ensure that you don&apos;t get an
-        irregularly shaped table.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li class="win">Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</h2>
-
-<p>You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of
-  cells:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Click in the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
-    an item from the submenu. For example, to select a table, click anywhere
-    inside the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
-    Table.</li>
-  <li>Or, you can use the mouse as a selection tool:
-    <ul>
-      <li>To select a group of adjacent cells: click in a cell, and then
-        drag to select the cells you want. Drag the mouse left or right to
-        select a row; up or down to select a column.</li>
-      <li>To select non-adjacent cells: press <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd>
-        <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> and then click inside a cell. Keep
-        pressing <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd> <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>
-        as you click to select additional cells.</li>
-      <li>To extend a selection to include adjacent cells: click inside a
-        cell and then drag over additional cells to extend the selection.</li>
-      <li>To select one or more adjacent columns or rows: drag up or down
-        to select the first column or row, and then drag left or right to
-        select additional adjacent columns or rows. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
-        and drag to the right to select an entire row. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
-        and drag up or down to select an entire column.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and Deleting
-  Tables</h2>
-
-<p>To move a table:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click inside the table.</li>
-  <li>Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>To copy or move the table: Use the Edit menu&apos;s cut, copy, and
-    paste options.</li>
-  <li>To delete the table: Open the Table menu again, choose Delete, and
-    then choose Table.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a Table</h2>
-
-<p>To convert text into a table:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that
-    Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection.</li>
-  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the
-    Convert to Table dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into
-    columns, or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as
-    the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to
-    ignore multiple space and treat them as one space.</li>
-  <li>Leave <q>Delete separator character</q> ticked to have Composer remove
-    the separator character when it converts the text into a table. If you
-    don&apos;t want Composer to delete the separator character, clear this
-    option.</li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: Text formatting is removed when the selected text
-  is converted to a table.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web
-  Page</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into
-      Your Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into Your
-  Page</h2>
-
-<p>You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network Graphics) images
-  into your web page. You can also use them to
-  <a href="#using_images_as_links">create links</a>. When you insert an image,
-  Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you plan to publish your pages to the web,
-  it&apos;s best not to use BMP images in your pages.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
-  before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to automatically
-  use relative references to images once you insert them.</p>
-
-<p>To insert an image:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to
-    appear.</li>
-  <li>Click the Image button
-    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" />
-    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the
-    Image Properties dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File
-    to search for an image file on your hard drive or network.</li>
-  <li>Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text that will
-    appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) when an image is
-    loading or when image loading is disabled. 
-
-    <p>Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for
-    example, alignment) in the
-    <a href="#editing_image_properties">Image Properties</a> dialogue box.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto
-  your page.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a line break after all images in a
-  paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</h2>
-
-<p>Once you&apos;ve inserted an image into your page, you can edit its
-  properties and customise the layout in your page, such as the height,
-  width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not currently viewing
-  the Image Properties dialogue box, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button
-    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" /> on the toolbar
-    to display the Image Properties dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Click the Location tab to edit these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Image Location</strong>: Type the filename and location of
-        the image file. Click Choose File to search for an image file on your
-        hard drive or network.</li>
-      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
-        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
-        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
-        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you
-        to keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
-        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
-
-        <p>Clearing this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
-          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to
-          images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
-          disc).</p>
-
-        <p>If you have never saved or published the page, you must first save
-          the page in order to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not
-          available if you open the Image Properties dialogue box in a message
-          compose window.)</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Attach this image to the message</strong>: If ticked,
-        the image is attached to the message you are sending. If cleared, a
-        link to the image location is inserted instead. (This tickbox is only
-        available if you open the Image Properties dialogue box in a message
-        compose window.)</li>
-      <li><strong>Alternate Text</strong>: Enter text that will display in
-        place of the original image; for example, a caption or a brief
-        description of the image. It&apos;s a good practice to specify
-        alternate text for readers who use text-only web browsers or who have
-        image loading turned off.</li>
-      <li><strong>Don&apos;t use alternate text</strong>: Choose this option
-        if the image does not require alternate text or if you don&apos;t want
-        to include it.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Actual Size</strong>: Select this option to undo any changes
-        you&apos;ve made to the dimensions and return the image to its original
-        size.</li>
-      <li><strong>Custom Size</strong>: Select this option and specify the new
-        height and width, in pixels or as a percentage. This setting
-        doesn&apos;t affect the original image file, just the image inserted
-        in your page.</li>
-      <li><strong>Constrain</strong>: If you change the image size, it&apos;s
-        a good idea to select this in order to maintain the image&apos;s aspect
-        ratio (so that it doesn&apos;t appear distorted). If you choose this
-        option, then you only need to change the height or width, but not
-        both.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Spacing</strong>: Specify the amount of space surrounding
-        the image; between the image and adjoining text. You can also put a
-        solid black border around the image and specify its width in pixels.
-        Specify zero for no border.</li>
-      <li><strong>Align Text to Image</strong>: If you&apos;ve placed your
-        image next to any text, select an alignment icon to indicate how you
-        want text positioned relative to the image.</li>
-      <li><strong>Image Map</strong>: Click Remove to remove any image map
-        settings.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click the Link tab to edit these properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Enter a web page location</strong>: If you want to define
-        a link for this image, enter the URL of a remote or local page, or
-        select a named anchor or heading from the drop-down list. Click Choose
-        File to search for a file on your hard drive or network.</li>
-      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
-        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
-        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
-        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
-        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
-        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
-
-        <p>Unticking this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
-          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to files
-          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disc).</p>
-
-        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
-          to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not available if you open
-          the Image Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Show border around linked image</strong>: If ticked,
-        displays the link highlight colour around the image.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
-    to display the
-    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page
-      Properties and Meta Tags</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
-      Backgrounds</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page Properties and Meta
-  Tags</h2>
-
-<p>Use the Page Properties dialogue box to enter properties such as the title,
-  author, and description of the document you&apos;re currently working on.
-  This information is useful if you plan to use the page on a web site, since
-  search engines use this type of information to index your page. You can view
-  this information from the browser window by opening the View menu and
-  choosing Page Info.</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.</li>
-  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Title</strong>: Type the text you want to appear as the
-        window title when someone views the page through a browser. This
-        is how most web search tools locate web pages, so choose a title
-        that conveys what your page is about.</li>
-      <li><strong>Author</strong>: Type the name of the person who created the
-        document. This information is helpful to readers who locate the
-        document by using a web search tool to search on name. 
-
-        <p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you enter the Author name in
-          Composer&apos;s <a href="#new_page_settings">preferences</a>, then
-          you won&apos;t have to enter it each time you create a new page.</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Description</strong>: Enter a brief description of the
-        document&apos;s contents.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
-  Backgrounds</h2>
-
-<p>You can change the background colour or specify a background
-  image for the page you&apos;re currently working on. These choices
-  affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing
-  the page through a browser.</p>
-
-<p>To set the colours and background for the current page, begin
-  from the Composer window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Colours and Background.</li>
-  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colours</strong>: Select this if you
-        want your page to use the colour settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
-        for text and links.</li>
-      <li><strong>Use custom colours</strong>: Select this if you want to
-        specify the colours of text and links. For each element, select a colour
-        from the Colour selection dialogue. Sample output for each type of link
-        appears in the pane on the right.</li>
-      <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Select this if you want the
-        background of your page to be an image. Type the name of the image
-        file or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard
-        drive or network. 
-
-        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
-          background colour selections.</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
-        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
-        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
-        server so that others can view them. 
-
-        <p>Using relative URLs allows you to keep all your linked files in
-          the same place relative to each other, regardless of their location
-          on your hard disc or a web server.</p>
-
-        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a
-          full (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking
-          to images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
-          disc).</p>
-
-        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in
-          order to enable this tickbox.</p>
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events,
-  click Advanced Edit to display the
-  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
-  Editor</a>.</p>
-
-<p>You can also set the <a href="#new_page_settings">default page
-  background and colours</a> for every new page you create in Composer.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in Composer</h1>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within
-      the Same Page</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other
-      Pages</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing
-      Links</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within the Same
-  Page</h2>
-
-<p>To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader
-  can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an
-  <em>anchor</em> (target location), and then create a link that points to the
-  anchor. Anchors are also called <em>named anchors</em>. To create an anchor,
-  follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you
-    want to create an anchor, or select some text.</li>
-  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor
-    Properties dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30
-    characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores
-    ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box already contains a
-    name.</li>
-  <li>Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the
-    anchor&apos;s location:
-    <img src="images/anchor-in-doc.gif" width="20" height="17" alt="" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the object:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
-  <li>Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see
-    the Link Properties dialogue box.
-    <ul>
-      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to an HTML file on your computer,
-        click Choose File to locate it.</li>
-      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a named anchor (target), select
-        it from the list of the anchors currently available in the page.</li>
-      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a level heading (for example,
-        Heading 1 - Heading 6), select it from the list of headings currently
-        available in the page.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: To test the link you just created, open the File
-  menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you did not first create named anchors, you can
-  use the Link dialogue box to create links to headings that already occur in
-  the page.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other Pages</h2>
-
-<p>You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or
-  on your workplace&apos;s network, or to remote pages on the Internet.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
-  before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer to automatically
-  use relative references for links once you create them.</p>
-
-<p>To create a link to another page:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or
-    select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
-  <li>Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Define your link:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Link text</strong>: If you&apos;ve already selected an image
-        file or text before clicking the Link button, the selected text or
-        file will be entered here. Otherwise, you must enter the text that you
-        want to use as the link.</li>
-      <li><strong>Link Location</strong>: Type the local path and filename or
-        remote URL of the page you want to link to. If you&apos;re not sure of
-        the path and filename for a local file, click Choose File to look for
-        it on your hard disc or network. For remote URLs, you can copy the URL
-        from the browser&apos;s Location Bar. Alternatively, you can select a
-        named anchor or a heading in the current page that you want to link
-        to.</li>
-      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
-        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
-        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
-        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
-        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
-        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
-
-        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
-          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to pages
-          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disc).</p>
-
-        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
-          to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not available if you open
-          the Link Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</p>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Attach the source of this link to the message</strong>: If
-        ticked, the source of the specified link is added as an attachment to
-        the message you are sending. If cleared, just a link to the location
-        is inserted instead. (This tickbox is only available if you open the
-        Link Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
-    to display the
-    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-  <li>To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and then click
-    the link to make sure it works as expected.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging
-  the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. For
-  example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, bookmark, or Mail
-  window and drop it onto your page. You can also right-click<span class="mac">
-  or, if you have a one-button mouse, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click</span> a link on a
-  web page and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the
-  link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties dialogue
-  box.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</h2>
-
-<p>You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in
-  your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window
-  displays the page that the image is linked to.</p>
-
-<p>To make an image behaving like a link:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select an image on your page.</li>
-  <li>Click the Link button
-    <img src="images/link.gif" width="22" height="20" alt="" />
-    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.</li>
-  <li>Use the Link Properties dialogue box to link the image to a
-    <a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">named anchor or heading
-    within the page</a>, or to a
-    <a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">separate local or remote page</a>.
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: Drag and drop a linked image from the browser window
-  into a Composer window to copy both the image and the link.</p>
-
-<p><strong>Note</strong>: To remove the blue border that can appear around
-  images used as links:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the linked image.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Image and Link Properties.</li>
-  <li>In the dialogue box, select the Link tab.</li>
-  <li>Untick <q>Show border around linked image</q>.</li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing Links</h2>
-
-<p>To remove a link:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included
-  as part of the link:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.</li>
-  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
- 
-<h1 id="publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on the Web</h1>
-
-<p>If your pages exist only on your local hard disc, you can browse your pages,
-  but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote
-  computer called a web server.</p>
-
-<p>When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your
-  pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. Most ISPs provide
-  space on their web servers for web page publishing. To find a web server
-  where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP, help desk, or system
-  administrator.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published
-      Document</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the
-      Filename or Publishing Location</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing
-      Site</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default
-      Publishing Site</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing
-      Site</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
-      Problems</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</h2>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
-  before you insert links or images into it. This allows Composer to
-  automatically use relative references for links and images once you insert
-  them.</p>
-
-<p>To publish a document:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer
-    document.</li>
-  <li>When you&apos;re ready to publish the document remotely, click the
-    Publish button.
-
-    <p>If you have published this document before, Composer remembers the
-      document&apos;s publishing settings and starts publishing the document.
-      While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a publishing status
-      dialogue box.</p>
-    <ul>
-      <li>If you have never published this document before, Composer displays
-        the Settings tab in the Publish Page dialogue box so you can enter
-        information about the document&apos;s remote publishing location. See
-        <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
-        information. When you&apos;re done entering information, click Publish.
-      </li>
-      <li>If you have never saved the document, Composer displays the Publish
-        tab in the Publish Page dialogue box, so you can enter the
-        document&apos;s filename. See
-        <a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a> for more
-        information. After entering the filename, click Publish.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li>To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test the
-    page&apos;s links and make sure there are no missing images.</li>
-  <li>Continue editing the page as necessary. When you&apos;re ready to update
-    the remote page with your changes, click the Publish button.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes the
-  document&apos;s <tt>file:///</tt> URL to an <tt>http://</tt> URL to indicate
-  that you are now editing the published document. If you want to save the
-  document locally (on your computer&apos;s hard disc), click the Save button.
-  You&apos;ll be prompted to choose a filename and location on your hard disc
-  for the document.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h3 id="tips_for_avoiding_broken_links_or_missing_images">Tips for Avoiding
-  Broken Links or Missing Images</h3>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Make sure your Composer filenames end with the .html or .htm file
-    extension. Make sure your image filenames end with the .JPG, .GIF, or .PNG
-    file extension. Don&apos;t use spaces or other special symbols in your
-    filenames. Keep your filenames short and only use lowercase or uppercase
-    letters and numbers.</li>
-  <li>If your images appear as broken links when you browse a document on the
-    web server, you may have forgotten to include the images when you
-    published. Open the File menu, and choose Publish As to display the Publish
-    Page dialogue box. In the Publish tab, make sure you tick <q>Include images
-    and other files</q> and then click Publish.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>For more troubleshooting tips, see
-  <a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
-  Problems</a>.
-</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published Document</h2>
-
-<p>To update a published document:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
-    select the document from the list. <p>Alternatively, browse to the location
-    of the document you want to update by entering the document&apos;s HTTP
-    address (the document&apos;s web address) in the browser&apos;s
-    Location Bar.</p></li>
-  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
-  <li>When you&apos;re ready to update the remote page with your changes, click
-    Publish in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To delete a page or image you&apos;ve published on a
-  web server, you must use an <a href="glossary.xhtml#ftp">FTP (File Transfer
-  Protocol)</a> program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create
-  subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your service
-  provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find
-  information on FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
-  provider&apos;s web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites
-  such as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename or
-  Publishing Location</h2>
-
-<p>To change a document&apos;s filename or publishing location:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
-    select the document from the list.
-
-    <p>Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want to update
-      by entering the document&apos;s HTTP address (the document&apos;s web
-      address) in the browser&apos;s Location Bar.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
-  <li>Open Composer&apos;s File menu and choose Publish As. Composer displays
-    the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Enter a different page title, if necessary.</li>
-  <li>Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.</li>
-  <li>From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you want to use.
-    To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. See
-    <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
-    information.</li>
-  <li>Click Publish to save the document to the new location.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing Site</h2>
-
-<p>If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote location, you can
-  set up Composer to save the publishing information for each remote site you
-  use, so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you want to
-  publish.</p>
-
-<p>To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
-    displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Click New Site.</li>
-  <li>For <q>Site Name</q>, enter the nickname by which you want to refer to
-    this publishing site. 
-
-    <p>For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents
-      related to the <q>Meteor</q> project, you might want to use the site
-      name <q>Meteor</q>. Site names remind you about the types of documents
-      you publish at each site.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>For <q>Publishing address</q>, enter the complete URL provided to
-    you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This
-    URL must begin with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. 
-
-    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
-      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
-      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>For <q>HTTP address of your home page</q>, enter the complete URL
-    that you would enter in the browser to view pages at this
-    site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
-
-    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
-      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
-      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
-      it blank.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>For <q>user name</q>, enter the user name you use to log in to your ISP
-    or web hosting service.</li>
-  <li>For <q>password</q>, enter the password for your user name.</li>
-  <li>Select <q>Save Password</q> to save your password securely using
-    Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you
-    publish pages at this site.</li>
-  <li>Click OK.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default Publishing
-  Site</h2>
-
-<p>If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you typically use
-  only one site for most of your publishing needs, you can designate the site
-  you use most often as the default publishing site. Composer will use the
-  default publishing site for all documents that you publish, unless you
-  specifically choose an alternate site.</p>
-
-<p>Regardless of how many sites you&apos;ve set up, you can always publish a
-  document to a different site by choosing Publish As from Composer&apos;s
-  File menu. See
-  <a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename
-  or Publishing Location</a> for more information.</p>
-
-<p>To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer
-  window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings.
-    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Select a publishing site from the list. 
-
-    <p>If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that
-      one as the default site.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click Set as Default.</li>
-  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing Site</h2>
-
-<p>Deleting a publishing site removes the site&apos;s settings from Composer.
-  If you later wish to publish to the site, you must re-enter the site&apos;s
-  settings.</p>
-
-<p>To delete a publishing site&apos;s settings, begin from a Composer
-  window:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
-    displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
-  <li>Select a publishing site from the list.</li>
-  <li>Click Remove Site.
-
-    <p>Composer only removes the site&apos;s settings; the remote site itself
-      is not affected.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
-  Problems</h2>
-
-<p>If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing
-  Status dialogue box displays an error message that can help you
-  determine what went wrong and how to fix it.</p>
-
-<p>If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your
-  hard disc by opening Composer&apos;s File menu, and choosing Save. You
-  can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To
-  quickly locate the file later, open Composer&apos;s File menu, and
-  choose Recent Pages.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
-      Settings</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h3 id="verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
-  Settings</h3>
-
-<p>To verify your publishing settings:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Close the Publishing Status dialogue box, if it is open.</li>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.</li>
-  <li>In the Publish Settings dialogue box, confirm that the site settings are
-    correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If you&apos;re not
-    sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Verify that you correctly entered the publishing
-        settings</strong>: You may have accidentally mis-typed one of the
-        settings.</li>
-      <li><strong>Verify that you entered the correct publishing
-        address</strong>: Web hosting services or ISPs may refer to the
-        publishing address as the <q>server name</q>, the <q>hostname</q>, or
-        the <q>server/host</q>. They often specify the publishing location as
-        <tt>ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>, where <tt>username</tt> is your
-        user name. 
-
-        <p>For the publishing address to be correct, you must precede the
-          publishing location with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
-          For example, the correct publishing address for the above-mentioned
-          site would be <tt>ftp://ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>.</p>
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ol>
-
-<h3 id="checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</h3>
-
-<p>Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure that the
-  filenames:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Use only numbers or lowercase or uppercase letters. While it&apos;s
-    acceptable to create filenames that use uppercase letters, you can avoid
-    potential errors in later locating the published file if you only use
-    lowercase letters in your filenames. 
-
-    <p>When you publish files to a web server, filenames become
-      case-sensitive on the web server. It may be harder for you to remember
-      files names that use only uppercase letters or that use a mix of
-      uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
-
-    <p>For example, when you try to locate a published file by typing the
-      filename&apos;s web address into the browser&apos;s Location Bar, you
-      must enter the filename exactly as you created it, using the same
-      combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>Don&apos;t use punctuation characters or spaces. Underscores ( _ )
-    or hyphens ( - ) are OK.</li>
-  <li>End with .html or .htm (for Composer filenames).</li>
-  <li>Use less than 32 characters.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</h3>
-
-<p>If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the messages 
-  Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the Publishing dialogue box.
-  You can use these error messages to help determine what went wrong and what
-  to do to fix the problem.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-  <p>Error Messages:</p>
-  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to
-    publish.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var>
-    doesn&apos;t exist on this site or the filename <var>filename</var> is
-    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is
-    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#server_not_found"><tt>The server is not available. Check your
-    connection and try again later.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#no_permission"><tt>You do not have permission to publish to this
-    location.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#offline_error"><tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon
-    near the lower-right corner of any window to go online.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#no_disk_space"><tt>There is not enough disc space available to
-    save the file <var>filename</var>.</tt></a></p>
-  <p><a href="#name_too_long"><tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too
-    long.</tt></a></p>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="file_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt> 
-    <p>or</p>
-    <tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to publish.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: One or more image files or CSS files
-    failed to publish because Composer could not find them. Some typical
-    reasons might be:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>The file location you typed is incorrect.</li>
-    <li>The file&apos;s location on the web is not accessible.</li>
-    <li>The file&apos;s location was changed or the file was deleted or
-      moved to another location.</li>
-  </ul>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Look for broken images in the page you are trying to publish. Broken
-      images will appear with this icon
-      <img src="images/broken.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" /> in the
-      page. To correct the image&apos;s address, double-click the broken
-      image to display the Image Properties dialogue box so you can enter the
-      correct address.</li>
-    <li>Remove the broken image from the page by selecting it (click once on
-      the image), and then pressing <kbd>Backspace</kbd> or <kbd>Delete</kbd>
-      on your keyboard.</li>
-    <li>If the image is unavailable because the server where the image resides
-      is inaccessible, try publishing the page at a later time.</li>
-    <li>If the missing file is a CSS file, you must first verify the correct
-      location of the CSS file. To fix the file&apos;s address in Composer,
-      click the HTML Source tab and edit the file&apos;s location in the HTML
-      source code. You should only edit the HTML source if you are familiar
-      with HTML tags.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="subdir_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var> doesn&apos;t exist on this
-      site or the filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
-      subdirectory</tt>
-    <p>or</p>
-    <tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
-      subdirectory</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You specified the name of a remote
-    subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. Composer can only
-    publish to a remote subdirectory that already exists at the publishing
-    location. Or, you specified a filename that is identical to the name of an
-    existing subdirectory at the publishing site.</p>
-
-  <p>For example, in the Publish Page dialogue box, under the Publish tab:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>for <q>Site subdirectory for this page</q>, you may have typed the name
-      of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing location.</li>
-    <li>you ticked <q>Include images and other files</q>, and then you typed
-      the name of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing
-      location.</li>
-    <li>one of the files you are attempting to publish has the same name as a
-      subdirectory at the publishing site.</li>
-  </ul>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Use a separate FTP program if you want to create, rename, or delete
-      subdirectories at the publishing site. Ask your service provider if they
-      recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find information on
-      FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
-      provider&apos;s web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware
-      sites such as ZDNet Downloads.</li>
-    <li>Don&apos;t use subdirectory names that end with <q>.html</q> or
-      <q>.htm</q>. Only your Composer filenames should end with <q>.html</q>
-      or <q>.htm</q>.</li>
-    <li>Subdirectory names are case-sensitive, so be sure to enter a
-      subdirectory name exactly as it appears at the publishing location.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="server_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>The server is not available. Check your connection and try again
-      later.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: This error can have many causes. For
-    example:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Your publishing site settings may not be correct.</li>
-    <li>Your Internet connection may have been lost.</li>
-    <li>Your modem or other equipment that you use to connect to the Internet
-      might not be functioning correctly.</li>
-    <li>The web server that you are trying to publish to might be unavailable
-      due to a technical problem or to an unknown circumstance.</li>
-    <li>Your ISP or web hosting service may be experiencing technical
-      problems.</li>
-  </ul>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Verify that your publishing settings are correct and that you entered
-      them correctly. See
-      <a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
-      Settings</a> for more information.</li>
-    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
-      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
-      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
-    <li>If your Internet connection is not working, verify that all hardware,
-      telephone connections, modems, and network connections are functioning
-      properly.</li>
-    <li>Use the browser to try to view a page at the web site you are
-      attempting to publish to. If you can successfully view other web sites but
-      cannot view a page at the publishing site, your ISP or web hosting
-      service may be experiencing technical problems.</li>
-    <li>Try publishing again later. Your ISP, web hosting service, or the web
-      server may be experiencing temporary technical difficulties.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="no_permission"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>You do not have permission to publish to this location.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish to a
-    location that you are not authorised to use. You can only publish to sites
-    where you have been granted access by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Verify that you entered the correct user name and password in the
-      Publishing Site Settings dialogue box, or in the Publish tab of the
-      Publish dialogue box.</li>
-    <li>Contact your ISP to find out where you can publish your pages at their
-      site.</li>
-    <li>Find a web hosting service that you can use to publish your pages. In
-      the browser, search for <q>web hosting</q>.</li>
-    <li>Use Netscape My Webpage <a href="http://mywebpage.netscape.com/">
-      <tt>http://mywebpage.netscape.com/</tt></a> to host your web pages, up
-      to 20 megabytes for free.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="offline_error"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner
-      of any window to go online.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish, but
-    your &brandShortName; Internet connection is currently in the
-    <q>offline</q> state. Your Internet connection must be in the <q>online</q>
-    state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your pages.</p>
-
-  <p>Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by looking at
-    the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any &brandShortName;
-    window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as
-    <img src="images/offline.png" width="32" height="21" alt="" />.</p>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Click the online/offline icon to go online. In the online state, the
-      icon should look like this:
-      <img src="images/online.png" width="32" height="20" alt="" />.</li>
-    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
-      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
-      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="no_disk_space"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>There is not enough disc space available to save the file
-      <var>filename</var>.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The remote web server&apos;s hard
-    disc is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disc space allocated
-    to you by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Use a separate FTP program to delete unnecessary files at your
-      publishing site. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
-      particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP programs
-      in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s web site.
-      FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such as ZDNet
-      Downloads.</li>
-    <li>Find out from your ISP or web hosting service about increasing your
-      disc space allocation, or switch to a different service that can satisfy
-      your needs.</li>
-    <li>If the web server is located at your company or school, contact the
-      network administrator to find out if you can publish to a different
-      location that has more disc space, or if you can request that
-      additional disc space be allocated to your current publishing
-      location.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<div class="errorMessage">
-  <p id="name_too_long"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
-
-  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
-    <tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too long.</tt>
-  </div>
-
-  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The number of characters in the
-    filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web server
-    computer that you are trying to publish to.</p>
-
-  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
-
-  <ul>
-    <li>Limit the length of your filenames and subdirectory names to less than
-      32 characters. Some operating systems do not support names longer than 32
-      characters.</li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes Composer&apos;s publishing settings. For
-  information on Composer&apos;s general and new page settings, see
-  <a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a>.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#publish_settings">Publish Settings</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h3 id="publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</h3>
-
-<p>The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want
-  to publish a document. These settings apply to the current
-  document.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab,
-  follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page
-    dialogue box appears.</li>
-  <li>Click the Publish tab.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Lists all the publishing sites you&apos;ve
-    created, so you can choose the site that you want to publish to. To
-    create a new site, click New Site.</li>
-  <li><strong>Page Title</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s page title as
-    it appears in the browser window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in
-    the browser. The document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of
-    bookmarks if you bookmark the page.</li>
-  <li><strong>Filename</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s filename. Make
-    sure you include the .html or .htm extension in the filename.
-
-    <p><strong>Warning</strong>: If a file on the remote site you&apos;re
-      publishing to has the same filename as one you&apos;re uploading, the
-      newly uploaded file will replace the existing one. You will not be
-      asked to confirm the action.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Site subdirectory for this page</strong>: If you leave this
-    blank, Composer publishes the page to the main (root) publishing
-    directory at this site. If you want to publish the page to a remote
-    subdirectory that resides underneath the main publishing directory
-    at this site, enter the name of the subdirectory or choose it from
-    the list. Composer keeps track of the locations you type here, so
-    you can select from a list of remote locations you&apos;ve previously
-    used. Keep in mind that subdirectory names are case-sensitive.
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: The site subdirectory you choose must
-      already exist at the remote server.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Include images and other files</strong>: If ticked,
-    Composer publishes any images and other files referenced by this
-    page. You can choose to publish these files to the same location as
-    the page, or else you can choose to publish these files into a
-    remote subdirectory that exists underneath the main publishing
-    directory.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To create remote subdirectories or delete
-  published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer
-  Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
-  particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP
-  programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s
-  web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such
-  as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h3 id="publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</h3>
-
-<p>The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login information for
-  the remote publishing site, as well as the publishing settings for the remote
-  site. These settings apply to the current document and any other files you
-  publish to this location.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, follow
-  these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page dialogue box
-    appears.</li>
-  <li>Click the Settings tab.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the nickname you want to use for
-    this publishing site. Enter a short name that will help you identify this
-    publishing site.</li>
-  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
-    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin with
-    either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. This name is often referred to
-    as the <q>host name</q> or the <q>host server name</q>.
-
-    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
-      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
-      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>HTTP address of your home page</strong>: Specifies the complete
-    address of your publishing home directory. This is the web address of the
-    home page at your web site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as
-    part of the URL.
-
-    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases, this
-      URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure what to
-      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave it blank.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log into
-    your ISP or network.</li>
-  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
-    name.</li>
-  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to encrypt and save your
-    password securely using Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to
-    enter it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h3 id="publish_settings">Publish Settings</h3>
-
-<p>The Publish Settings dialogue box lets you create, edit, and
-  delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default
-  publishing site.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialogue box,
-  follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
-    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>New Site</strong>: Lets you specify settings for a new publishing
-    site. Composer adds the name of the new publishing site to the list
-    of available publishing sites.</li>
-  <li><strong>Set as Default</strong>: Sets the selected publishing site as the
-    default publishing site. Typically, the default publishing site is
-    the remote location that you most often use for publishing
-    documents. All documents you create or edit will be published to
-    the default publishing site, unless you specifically choose an
-    alternate site in the Publish Page dialogue box.
-
-    <p>To publish a document to a different remote location, open the
-      File menu and choose Publish As to choose a different publishing
-      destination.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Remove Site</strong>: Removes the selected site and its settings
-    from Composer.</li>
-  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the name by which you want to refer
-    to this publishing site.</li>
-  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
-    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin
-    with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
-
-    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents
-      are published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to
-      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>HTTP address of your homepage</strong>: Specifies the HTTP
-    address of your publishing home directory. Do not include a
-    filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
-
-    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
-      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
-      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
-      it blank.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log in to
-    your ISP or network.</li>
-  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
-    name.</li>
-  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to save your
-    password securely using Password Manager so you don&apos;t have to enter
-    it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
-  section</a>]</p>
-
-<h1 id="composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</h1>
-
-<p>This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If
-  you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>For information on Composer&apos;s publishing settings, see
-  <a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a>.</p>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#composer">Composer</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#new_page_settings">New Page Settings</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</h2>
-
-<p>Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving files and for
-  table editing. These settings apply to every document you create.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Click the Composer category.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Maximum number of pages listed</strong>: Specify the maximum
-    number of pages that are listed under Recent Pages in the File menu.</li>
-  <li><strong>Preserve original source formatting</strong>: Select this if you
-    want to preserve the original white space (extra lines, tabs, etc.) in the
-    HTML source code. Deselect this if you prefer Composer to indent and add
-    linebreaks to the code in order to make it more readable. <em>This
-    preference does not affect how your pages appear in a browser
-    window.</em></li>
-  <li><strong>Save images and other associated files when saving
-    pages</strong>: If ticked, all images, JavaScript (JS), Cascading Style
-    Sheet (CSS), and other associated files are saved in the same location as
-    the document when the document is saved for the first time or when the
-    document is saved to a new location. If cleared, only the HTML file is
-    saved.
-
-    <p>For example, when editing a remote page, this setting ensures that all
-      related files associated with the remote page will be saved locally when
-      you save the page to your hard disc.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Always show Publish dialogue when publishing pages</strong>: If
-    ticked, Composer always displays the Publish Page dialogue box when you
-    click the Publish button or choose Publish from the File menu. If not
-    ticked, Composer only displays the Publish Page dialogue box if it needs
-    more information in order to publish the page.</li>
-  <li><strong>Maintain table layout when inserting or deleting cells</strong>:
-    Select this if you want Composer to always preserve the table&apos;s
-    layout (that is, keep it in a rectangular shape) by adding cells where
-    needed. If you deselect this option, when you delete one or more cells,
-    Composer removes the cell border as well, which can result in a table with
-    empty spaces, or an outline that appears irregular due to an uneven number
-    of cells.</li>
-  <li><strong>Use CSS styles instead of HTML elements and attributes</strong>:
-    Enables the use of Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) formatting in your Composer
-    documents. With this preference enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
-    formatting with CSS inline styles for elements.
-
-    <p>If this preference is not enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
-      formatting, but does not use CSS styles.</p>
-
-    <p>Compared to HTML, HTML with CSS formatting is more portable, more
-      maintainable, and more compatible when viewed with different browsers.
-      If you enable this preference and then edit a document created without
-      CSS, Composer replaces the edited elements with CSS styles.</p>
-
-    <p>If you enable CSS styles, you can choose a text highlight colour for
-      selected text using the text highlight colour button on the Format
-      toolbar. You can also choose a colour background for any element on the
-      page. (These features are not available if this preference is not
-      enabled.)</p>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong><kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> in a
-     paragraph always creates a new paragraph</strong>: If selected, a new
-     paragraph will be added everytime you press the <kbd class="mac">Return
-     </kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key inside a paragraph. If
-     deselected, a linebreak will be added when you press the <kbd
-     class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="new_page_settings">Composer Preferences - New Page Settings</h2>
-
-<p>New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colours and
-  background images that apply to every document you create.</p>
-
-<p>If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these
-  steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Double-click the Composer category and click New Page Settings.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Author</strong>: Enter your name. This will add your name to the
-    HTML source code for each new page you create.</li>
-  <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colours</strong>: Select this if you always
-    want your pages to use the colour settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
-    for text and link elements.</li>
-  <li><strong>Use custom colours</strong>: Select this if you always want to
-    specify the colours that are applied to text and link elements. Then for
-    each element, select a colour by clicking the colour button next to each
-    element.</li>
-  <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Type the location and name of an image
-    file, or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard disc or
-    network. 
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
-      background colour.</p>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and
-  choose Page Title and Properties.</p>
-
-<p>To change the page colours and background image for an individual page: Open
-  the Format menu and choose Page Colours and Background.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<p>&copyright.string;</p>
-
-</body>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>Creating Web Pages with &brandShortName; Composer</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="creating_web_pages_with_mozilla_composer">Creating Web Pages with
+  &brandShortName; Composer</h1>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish
+  them on the web. You don&apos;t have to know HTML to use Composer; it is as
+  easy to use as a word processor.</p>
+
+<p>Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to other pages,
+  colours, and font styles. You can see what your document will look like on
+  the Web as you create it, and you can easily share your document with
+  other users, no matter what type of browser or HTML-capable email program
+  they use.</p>
+
+<p>To start using &brandShortName; Composer:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the Composer icon in the lower-left corner of any
+    &brandShortName; window.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<div><img src="images/composer_icon.png" width="128" height="23"
+  alt="" /></div>
+<div style="-moz-margin-start: 80px;"><strong>Composer icon</strong></div>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#starting_a_new_page">Starting a New Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web
+      Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to
+      Your Web Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in
+      Composer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on
+      the Web</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h1 id="starting_a_new_page" style="margin-top: 50px;">Starting a New Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your
+      New Page</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="creating_a_new_page">Creating a New Page</h2>
+
+<p>&brandShortName; Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that
+  allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a <em>WYSIWYG</em> (What
+  You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look
+  to the reader as you&apos;re creating it. It is not necessary for you to know
+  HTML, since most of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from
+  the toolbars and menus.</p>
+
+<p>Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view or edit the
+  HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the
+  &lt;HTML&gt; Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the
+  Composer window.</p>
+
+<p>To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once
+  you&apos;ve started a page, you can add and edit text just as you would
+  in a word processor.</p>
+
+<p><strong>To create a new page from the browser</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu, choose New, and then Composer Page. A Composer
+    window containing a blank page opens.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To edit a page you&apos;re currently viewing in the
+  browser</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>In the browser window of the page you&apos;re viewing, open the File
+    menu and choose Edit Page. You see a Composer window that contains the
+    page you&apos;re viewing.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To create a new page in Composer</strong>:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click the New button in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive</strong>:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer
+    window.</li>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File
+    dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.</li>
+  <li>Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>To edit a web page</strong>:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Window menu and choose Browser.</li>
+  <li>Go to a web page: type the URL of the page (for example,
+    <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>) in the Location Bar and press
+    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>.</li>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most
+  recent file you&apos;ve been working on by opening the File menu, choosing
+  Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from the list.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="saving_and_browsing_your_new_page">Saving and Browsing Your New
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. Saving a
+  document in HTML format preserves the document&apos;s formatting, such
+  as text styles (for example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images.
+  Saving a document in text-only format removes all the HTML tags but
+  preserves the document&apos;s text.</p>
+
+<p>To save a document as an HTML file:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Save or click the Save button on the
+    Composition toolbar.
+
+    <p>If you haven&apos;t already given your page a title, Composer prompts
+      you to do so. Composer displays the page title in the browser
+      window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in the browser. The
+      document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of bookmarks
+      if you bookmark the page.</p>
+
+    <p>Composer then prompts you to enter a filename and specify the location
+      where you want to save the file. Make sure you preserve the .html
+      extension in the filename.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Choose Save As and select a different filename or location.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the HTML, images
+  and other files, such as sound files and style sheets), are saved locally
+  on your hard drive. If you only want to save the HTML part of the page, you
+  must change the Composer preference for saving pages. See
+  <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</a> for more information
+  on changing Composer&apos;s setting for saving pages.</p>
+
+<p>If an image location is absolute (starts with <q>http://</q>) and you are
+  connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the document in
+  Composer and the browser. However, if the image location is relative to the
+  page location (starts with <q>file:///</q>), then you won&apos;t see the
+  image in the local version of the document.</p>
+
+<p>To save a document as a text-only file:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.</li>
+  <li>Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the
+    file.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Images do not appear in documents saved in the
+  text-only format.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File
+  menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in which
+  you&apos;re working. Keep in mind that your current changes will be lost.</p>
+
+<p>To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Browse Page (or click Browse in the
+    Composition toolbar). If you have not yet saved your document, Composer
+    prompts you to enter a page title, filename, and location. The Composer
+    window remains open behind the new browser window.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#starting_a_new_page">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="formatting_your_web_pages">Formatting Your Web Pages</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting
+      Paragraphs, Headings, and Lists</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#working_with_lists">Working with Lists</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Colour,
+      Style, and Font</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or
+      Discontinuing Text Styles</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing
+      Text</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal
+      Lines</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special
+      Characters</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML
+      Elements and Attributes</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing
+      Mode</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="formatting_paragraphs_headings_and_lists">Formatting Paragraphs,
+  Headings, and Lists</h2>
+
+<p>To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to begin,
+    or select the text you want to format.</li>
+  <li>Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Body Text</strong>: Applies the application default font and
+        style for regular text, without affecting the spacing before or after
+        the text.</li>
+      <li><strong>Paragraph</strong>: Inserts a paragraph tag (use this to
+        begin a new paragraph). The paragraph includes top and bottom
+        margins.</li>
+      <li><strong>Heading 1</strong> - <strong>Heading 6</strong>: Formats the
+        paragraph as a heading. Heading 1 is the highest-level heading, while
+        Heading 6 is the lowest-level heading.</li>
+      <li><strong>Address</strong>: Can be used for a web page <q>signature</q>
+        that indicates the author of the page and the person to contact for
+        more information, for example: <tt>user@example.com</tt> 
+
+        <p>You might want to include the date and a copyright notice. This
+          format usually appears at the bottom of the web page under a
+          horizontal line. The browser displays the address format in
+          italics.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Preformat</strong>: This is useful for elements such as code
+        examples, column data, and mail messages that you want displayed in a
+        fixed-width font. In normal text, most browsers remove extra spaces,
+        tabs, and paragraph returns. However, text that uses the Preformatted
+        style is displayed with the white space intact, preserving the layout
+        of the original text.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To format text as a heading:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you
+    want to format.</li>
+  <li>Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of
+    heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose <q>Heading 1</q>
+    for your main heading, <q>Heading 2</q> for the next level, and so
+    forth.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To apply a list item format:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want
+    to format.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List.</li>
+  <li>Choose the list style:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Bulleted</strong>: Each item has a bullet (dot) next to it
+        (as in this list).</li>
+      <li><strong>Numbered</strong>: Items are numbered.</li>
+      <li><strong>Term</strong> and <strong>Definition</strong>: These two
+        styles work together, creating a glossary-style appearance. Use the
+        Term tag for the word being defined, and the Definition tag for the
+        definition. The Term text appears flush left, and the Definition
+        text appears indented.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of
+  text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List
+  <img src="images/numbers.gif" width="21" height="21" alt="" />
+  or Bulleted List
+  <img src="images/bullets.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" />
+  buttons on the Format toolbar.</p>
+
+<p>To change the style of bullets or numbers:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you
+    want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to
+    apply a new style to the entire list.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.</li>
+  <li>Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered
+    lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can
+    change the bullet style.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can also double-click on a bullet or number in a
+  list to display the List Properties dialogue box.</p>
+
+<p>To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centring or
+  aligning to the left or right:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text
+    you want to align.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment
+    option.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: You can also use the Format toolbar to align
+  text.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="working_with_lists">Working with Lists</h2>
+
+<p>To end a list and continue typing body text:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the end of the last list item and
+    press <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> twice to
+    end the list.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change one or more list items to body text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the
+    list items.</li>
+  <li>In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted
+    list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To position indented text below a list item:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point within the list item.</li>
+  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
+    class="noMac">Enter</kbd>to create the hanging indent.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to indent.</li>
+  <li>Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd
+    class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create another indented paragraph, or press
+    <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> to create the
+    next list item.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list
+  items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the Indent or
+  Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, click anywhere in a
+  list item and press <kbd>Tab</kbd> to indent one level. Press
+  <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> to outdent one level.</p>
+
+<p>To merge two adjacent lists:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of
+    the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists
+    will also become part of the merged list.</li>
+  <li>Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar to
+    merge the lists.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_text_color_style_and_font">Changing Text Colour, Style, and
+  Font</h2>
+
+<p>To change the style, colour, or font of selected text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text you want to format.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose one of the following:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Font</strong>: Use this to choose a font. If you prefer to
+        use fonts specified by the reader&apos;s browser, select Variable
+        Width or Fixed Width.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: The fonts Helvetica, Arial, Times, and
+          Courier generally look the same when viewed on different computers.
+          If you select a different font, it may not look the same when viewed
+          using a different computer.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to choose a <em>relative</em> font
+        size or select an option to increase or decrease text size (relative
+        to the surrounding text).</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Style</strong>: Use this to select a style, such as
+        italic, bold, or underline, or to apply a structured style, for
+        example, Code.</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Colour</strong>: Use this to choose a colour from the
+        colour picker. If you are familiar with HTML hexadecimal colour codes,
+        you can type a specific code or you can just type a colour name (for
+        example, <q>blue</q>). You&apos;ll find the official W3C list of CSS
+        supported colour names
+        <a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#color-units">here</a>,
+        and another list of commonly supported colour names 
+        <a href="http://www.w3schools.com/html/html_colornames.asp">here</a>.
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To change the background colour of the page:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click anywhere in the page.</li>
+  <li>Click the background colour block in the Format toolbar.</li>
+  <li>Choose a background colour from the Block Background Colour dialogue
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly change the colour of text to the colour
+  last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text colour
+  block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to use one
+  colour for separate lines of text.</p>
+
+<p>You can also use an image as a background. See
+  <a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
+  Backgrounds</a>.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_text_styles">Removing or Discontinuing Text
+  Styles</h2>
+
+<p>To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.</li>
+  <li>Continue typing.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To continue typing text with all text styles removed:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text
+    styles.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.</li>
+  <li>Continue typing.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="finding_and_replacing_text">Finding and Replacing Text</h2>
+
+<p>To find text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
+    search.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
+    Replace dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to locate in the <q>Find what</q> field. To narrow
+    the search, tick one or more of the following options:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
+        the search is for case-sensitive text.</li>
+      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
+        page and then start again from the top or bottom, depending on whether
+        you are searching forward or backwards.</li>
+      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search back from the
+        insertion point to the beginning of the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first
+    occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the next
+    occurrence.</li>
+  <li>Click Close when you have finished.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To find and replace text in the page you&apos;re currently working on:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your
+    search.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and
+    Replace dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement text.</li>
+  <li>To narrow the search, tick one or more of the following options:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Match exact case</strong>: Use this to specify whether
+        the search is for case-sensitive text. If you don&apos;t select this
+        option, the search will find matching text in both upper and lower
+        case.</li>
+      <li><strong>Wrap around</strong>: Use this to search to the end of the
+        page and then start again from the top.</li>
+      <li><strong>Search backwards</strong>: Use this to search from the end
+        to the beginning of the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the
+    next occurrence of the text.</li>
+  <li>Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text.
+    Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find the next
+    occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document
+    with the replacement text.</li>
+  <li>Click Close when you have finished.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_horizontal_lines">Inserting Horizontal Lines</h2>
+
+<p>Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different sections of a
+  document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also called a <em>rule</em>)
+  in your page, begin from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to
+    appear.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<h3 id="setting_horizontal_line_properties">Setting Horizontal Line
+  Properties</h3>
+
+<p>You can customise a line&apos;s height, length, width, alignment, and
+  shading.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialogue
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Width</strong>: Enter the width and then choose <q>% of
+        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage,
+        the line&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s
+        or browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Height</strong>: Type a number for the line&apos;s height
+        (in pixels).</li>
+      <li><strong>3-D Shading</strong>: Select this to add depth to the line
+        by adding a bevel shading.</li>
+      <li><strong>Alignment</strong>: Specify where you want to place the
+        line (left, centre, or right).</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time
+    you insert a horizontal line.</li>
+  <li>To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click Advanced
+    Edit. See the section,
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>,
+    for details.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can select <q>HTML Tags</q> from the View menu to
+  show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to select
+  everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any yellow box to
+  display the
+  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>
+  dialogue box for that HTML tag or element.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_special_characters">Inserting Special Characters</h2>
+
+<p>To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency
+  symbols:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character
+    to appear.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the
+    Insert Character dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Select a category of characters.
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you choose Accent Uppercase or Accent Lowercase, then open the
+        Letter drop-down list and select the letter you wish to apply an
+        accent to. (Note: not all letters have accented forms.) Select
+        Common Symbols to insert special characters such as copyright symbols
+        or fractions.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to
+    insert.</li>
+  <li>Click Insert. 
+
+    <p>You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window)
+      while you keep this dialogue box open, in case you want to use it
+      again.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Close when you have finished inserting special characters.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_html_elements_and_attributes">Inserting HTML Elements and
+  Attributes</h2>
+
+<p>If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert
+  additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are
+  not sure how to work with HTML source code, it&apos;s best not to change it.
+  To work with HTML code, use one of these methods:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Place the insertion point where you want to insert the HTML code, or
+    select the text you want to edit, and then open the Insert menu and choose
+    HTML. In the Insert HTML dialogue box, enter HTML tags and text, and then
+    click Insert.</li>
+  <li>Select an element such as a table, named anchor, image, link, or
+    horizontal line. Double-click the element to open the associated properties
+    dialogue box for that item. Click Advanced Edit to open the Advanced Property
+    Editor. You can use the Advanced Property Editor to add HTML attributes,
+    JavaScript, and CSS to objects.</li>
+  <li>Open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the &lt;HTML&gt;
+    Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the Composer window.
+    (If you don&apos;t see the Edit Mode toolbar, open the View menu and choose
+    Show/Hide; then make sure the Edit Mode Toolbar is ticked.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="using_the_advanced_property_editor">Using the Advanced Property
+  Editor</h3>
+
+<p>To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images,
+  and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or
+  modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it&apos;s best not to do
+  so.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialogue box,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose HTML Tags.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Properties
+    dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Click Advanced Edit to open the object&apos;s Advanced Property Editor.
+    The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which lists the
+    current properties for the selected object:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>HTML Attributes</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        additional HTML attributes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Inline Style</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        additional CSS (cascading style sheet) properties through the
+        &lt;style&gt; attribute. For more information on using CSS styles
+        in Composer, see
+        <a href="#composer">Composer Preferences -Composer</a>.</li>
+      <li><strong>JavaScript Events</strong>: Click this tab to view or enter
+        JavaScript events.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, select the
+    attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute&apos;s name
+    or value using the editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of
+    the dialogue box. To add a new attribute, type it in the Attribute field
+    at the bottom of the dialogue box. The new attribute is automatically added
+    when you click in the Value field. To remove an attribute, select it in
+    the list, and click Remove Attribute.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Required attributes are highlighted in the
+      Attribute list.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialogue
+    box.</li>
+  <li>Click OK again to exit the Properties dialogue box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="validating_the_html">Validating the HTML</h2>
+
+<p>Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you
+  should first check the document&apos;s HTML formatting to make sure it
+  conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less
+  likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually
+  checking your web pages in the browser doesn&apos;t ensure that your document
+  will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers.</p>
+
+<p>Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document
+  conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses
+  the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document&apos;s HTML
+  syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. This service also provides
+  information on how to correct errors.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: You must be connected to the Internet to use this
+  feature.</p>
+
+<p>To validate your document&apos;s HTML syntax:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved
+    changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.</li>
+  <li>When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click <q>Browse</q>
+    and locate the file on your hard disc that you want to validate.</li>
+  <li>Click <q>Check</q>.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="choosing_the_right_editing_mode">Choosing the Right Editing Mode</h2>
+
+<p>Typically, you won&apos;t need to change the editing mode from the default
+  (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document&apos;s HTML source
+  code, you may want to change editing modes.</p>
+
+<p>Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes or views.
+  Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your document, but
+  displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons).</p>
+
+<p>Before you choose an editing mode:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then make sure there is a
+    tickmark next to Edit Mode Toolbar.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Normal</strong>: Choose this editing mode to see how the document
+    will look online while you are creating it. Choose this mode to
+    show table borders and named anchor icons. All other HTML tag icons
+    are hidden.</li>
+  <li><strong>HTML Tags</strong>: Choose this mode to show all HTML tag
+    icons.</li>
+  <li><strong>&lt;HTML&gt; Source</strong>: Choose this mode to view and edit
+    the document as unformatted HTML source code. When you save the
+    document, the Normal mode reappears.</li>
+  <li><strong>Preview</strong>: Choose this mode to display and edit the
+    document exactly as it would appear in a browser window, except
+    that links and JavaScript functions will not be active.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: JavaScript functions, frames, links, Java,
+  embedded objects and animated GIF files are not active in any of
+  the editing modes. To display these items in their active
+  state, click the Browse button on the Composition toolbar to
+  load the page into a browser window.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#formatting_your_web_pages">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Adding Tables to Your Web Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
+      Properties</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and
+      Deleting Rows, Columns, and Cells</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and
+      Deleting Tables</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a
+      Table</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_a_table">Inserting a Table</h2>
+
+<p>Tables are useful for organising text, pictures, and data into formatted
+  rows and columns. To insert a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table button
+    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
+    Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialogue box appears.</li>
+  <li>Type the number of rows and columns you want.
+    <ul>
+      <li>(Optional) Enter a size for the table width, and select either
+        percentage of the window or pixels.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no
+    border.
+  
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate
+      tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
+      is viewed in a browser.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To change additional properties for your new table, see
+  <a href="#changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s
+  Properties</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a table within a table, open the
+  Insert menu and choose Table.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_a_tables_properties">Changing a Table&apos;s Properties</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire
+  table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If
+  you are not currently viewing the Table Properties dialogue box, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table button
+    <img src="images/table.gif" width="25" height="26" alt="" /> on the
+    toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table
+    Properties dialogue box contains two tabs: Table and Cells.</li>
+  <li>Click the Table tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Use this to specify the number of rows and
+        columns. Enter the width of the table and then choose <q>% of
+        window</q> or <q>pixels</q>. If you specify width as a percentage, the
+        table&apos;s width changes whenever the Composer window&apos;s or
+        browser window&apos;s width changes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Borders and Spacing</strong>: Use this to specify, in pixels,
+        the border line width, the space between cells, and the cell padding
+        (the space between the contents of the cell and its border).
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Composer uses a dotted outline to display
+          tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page
+          is viewed in a browser.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Table Alignment</strong>: Use this to align the table within
+        the page. Choose an option from the drop-down list.</li>
+      <li><strong>Caption</strong>: Choose the caption placement from the
+        drop-down list.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background Colour</strong>: Use this to choose a colour for
+        the table background, or leave it as transparent.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced
+    Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialogue box, or
+    click OK to confirm them.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose
+    Table Properties. The Table Properties dialogue box appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Selection</strong>: Choose Cell, Row, or Column from the
+        drop-down list. Click Previous or Next to move through rows, columns,
+        or cells.</li>
+      <li><strong>Size</strong>: Type a number for Height and Width, and then
+        choose <q>% of table</q> or <q>pixels</q>.</li>
+      <li><strong>Content Alignment</strong>: Select a vertical and horizontal
+        alignment type for the text or data inside each cell.</li>
+      <li><strong>Cell Style</strong>: Select Header from the drop-down list
+        for column or row headers (which centres and bolds the text in the
+        cell); otherwise choose Normal.</li>
+      <li><strong>Text Wrap</strong>: Select <q>Don&apos;t wrap</q> from the
+        drop-down list to keep text from wrapping to the next line unless you
+        insert a paragraph break. Otherwise, choose Wrap.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background Colour</strong>: Select a colour for the cell
+        background or leave it as transparent.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript
+          events, click Advanced Edit to display the
+          <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
+          Editor</a>
+        </p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialogue box, or
+    click OK to confirm them.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the text colour or background colour of one
+  or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click
+  anywhere in the table and then click the text colour or background colour
+  icon in the Format toolbar.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To change the colour of cells to the colour last used,
+  select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background colour picker.
+  This is useful when you want to use one colour for individual cells.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="adding_and_deleting_rows_columns_and_cells">Adding and Deleting Rows,
+  Columns, and Cells</h2>
+
+<p>Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, columns,
+  or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that allow you to
+  maintain the original rectangular structure or layout of the table while
+  you perform editing tasks.</p>
+
+<p>To add a cell, row, or column to your table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.</li>
+  <li>Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table
+    within a table cell.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To delete a cell, row, or column:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or,
+    select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To
+    select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select.
+    To select individual cells in a table, hold down the
+    <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> key and click
+    on the cells you want to select.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Delete.</li>
+  <li>Choose the item you want to delete.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click inside the cell on the left, open the Table menu, and
+    choose Join with Cell to the Right.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To join (or merge) adjacent cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Select adjacent cells by dragging over them.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu, and choose Join Selected Cells.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click inside the joined cell, open the Table menu, and then
+    choose Split Cell. Composer puts the entire contents of the joined
+    cell into the first of the two cells.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Refer to <a href="#selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</a>
+  for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and
+  columns.</p>
+
+<h3 id="changing_the_default_table_editing_behavior">Changing the Default Table
+  Editing Behaviour</h3>
+
+<p>By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the
+  table&apos;s structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever
+  needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells but still maintain
+  the table&apos;s original rectangular layout, or structure. Otherwise,
+  deleting cells can result in a table with empty spaces, or whose outline
+  appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells.</p>
+
+<p>To change the default table editing behaviour, begin from the Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu, choose Preferences, and then choose
+    Composer.</li>
+  <li>Under Editing, set the following preference:
+    <ul>
+      <li>Make sure that <q>Maintain table layout when inserting or
+        deleting cells</q> is ticked to ensure that you don&apos;t get an
+        irregularly shaped table.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li class="win">Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="selecting_table_elements">Selecting Table Elements</h2>
+
+<p>You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of
+  cells:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Click in the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
+    an item from the submenu. For example, to select a table, click anywhere
+    inside the table, open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose
+    Table.</li>
+  <li>Or, you can use the mouse as a selection tool:
+    <ul>
+      <li>To select a group of adjacent cells: click in a cell, and then
+        drag to select the cells you want. Drag the mouse left or right to
+        select a row; up or down to select a column.</li>
+      <li>To select non-adjacent cells: press <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd>
+        <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd> and then click inside a cell. Keep
+        pressing <kbd class="mac">Cmd</kbd> <kbd class="noMac">Ctrl</kbd>
+        as you click to select additional cells.</li>
+      <li>To extend a selection to include adjacent cells: click inside a
+        cell and then drag over additional cells to extend the selection.</li>
+      <li>To select one or more adjacent columns or rows: drag up or down
+        to select the first column or row, and then drag left or right to
+        select additional adjacent columns or rows. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
+        and drag to the right to select an entire row. Press <kbd>Shift</kbd>
+        and drag up or down to select an entire column.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="moving_copying_and_deleting_tables">Moving, Copying, and Deleting
+  Tables</h2>
+
+<p>To move a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click inside the table.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>To copy or move the table: Use the Edit menu&apos;s cut, copy, and
+    paste options.</li>
+  <li>To delete the table: Open the Table menu again, choose Delete, and
+    then choose Table.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="converting_text_into_a_table">Converting Text into a Table</h2>
+
+<p>To convert text into a table:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that
+    Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection.</li>
+  <li>Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the
+    Convert to Table dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into
+    columns, or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as
+    the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to
+    ignore multiple space and treat them as one space.</li>
+  <li>Leave <q>Delete separator character</q> ticked to have Composer remove
+    the separator character when it converts the text into a table. If you
+    don&apos;t want Composer to delete the separator character, clear this
+    option.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: Text formatting is removed when the selected text
+  is converted to a table.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_tables_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="adding_images_to_your_web_page">Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web
+  Page</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into
+      Your Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="inserting_an_image_into_your_page">Inserting an Image into Your
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network Graphics) images
+  into your web page. You can also use them to
+  <a href="#using_images_as_links">create links</a>. When you insert an image,
+  Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: If you plan to publish your pages to the web,
+  it&apos;s best not to use BMP images in your pages.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to automatically
+  use relative references to images once you insert them.</p>
+
+<p>To insert an image:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to
+    appear.</li>
+  <li>Click the Image button
+    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" />
+    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the
+    Image Properties dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File
+    to search for an image file on your hard drive or network.</li>
+  <li>Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text that will
+    appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) when an image is
+    loading or when image loading is disabled. 
+
+    <p>Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for
+    example, alignment) in the
+    <a href="#editing_image_properties">Image Properties</a> dialogue box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto
+  your page.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To insert a line break after all images in a
+  paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="editing_image_properties">Editing Image Properties</h2>
+
+<p>Once you&apos;ve inserted an image into your page, you can edit its
+  properties and customise the layout in your page, such as the height,
+  width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not currently viewing
+  the Image Properties dialogue box, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button
+    <img src="images/image.gif" width="23" height="25" alt="" /> on the toolbar
+    to display the Image Properties dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Click the Location tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Image Location</strong>: Type the filename and location of
+        the image file. Click Choose File to search for an image file on your
+        hard drive or network.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you
+        to keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
+
+        <p>Clearing this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to
+          images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
+          disc).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have never saved or published the page, you must first save
+          the page in order to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not
+          available if you open the Image Properties dialogue box in a message
+          compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Attach this image to the message</strong>: If ticked,
+        the image is attached to the message you are sending. If cleared, a
+        link to the image location is inserted instead. (This tickbox is only
+        available if you open the Image Properties dialogue box in a message
+        compose window.)</li>
+      <li><strong>Alternate Text</strong>: Enter text that will display in
+        place of the original image; for example, a caption or a brief
+        description of the image. It&apos;s a good practice to specify
+        alternate text for readers who use text-only web browsers or who have
+        image loading turned off.</li>
+      <li><strong>Don&apos;t use alternate text</strong>: Choose this option
+        if the image does not require alternate text or if you don&apos;t want
+        to include it.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Actual Size</strong>: Select this option to undo any changes
+        you&apos;ve made to the dimensions and return the image to its original
+        size.</li>
+      <li><strong>Custom Size</strong>: Select this option and specify the new
+        height and width, in pixels or as a percentage. This setting
+        doesn&apos;t affect the original image file, just the image inserted
+        in your page.</li>
+      <li><strong>Constrain</strong>: If you change the image size, it&apos;s
+        a good idea to select this in order to maintain the image&apos;s aspect
+        ratio (so that it doesn&apos;t appear distorted). If you choose this
+        option, then you only need to change the height or width, but not
+        both.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Spacing</strong>: Specify the amount of space surrounding
+        the image; between the image and adjoining text. You can also put a
+        solid black border around the image and specify its width in pixels.
+        Specify zero for no border.</li>
+      <li><strong>Align Text to Image</strong>: If you&apos;ve placed your
+        image next to any text, select an alignment icon to indicate how you
+        want text positioned relative to the image.</li>
+      <li><strong>Image Map</strong>: Click Remove to remove any image map
+        settings.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click the Link tab to edit these properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Enter a web page location</strong>: If you want to define
+        a link for this image, enter the URL of a remote or local page, or
+        select a named anchor or heading from the drop-down list. Click Choose
+        File to search for a file on your hard drive or network.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
+        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
+
+        <p>Clearing this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to files
+          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disc).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
+          to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not available if you open
+          the Image Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Show border around linked image</strong>: If ticked,
+        displays the link highlight colour around the image.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#adding_images_to_your_web_page">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="setting_page_properties">Setting Page Properties</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page
+      Properties and Meta Tags</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
+      Backgrounds</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="setting_page_properties_and_meta_tags">Setting Page Properties and Meta
+  Tags</h2>
+
+<p>Use the Page Properties dialogue box to enter properties such as the title,
+  author, and description of the document you&apos;re currently working on.
+  This information is useful if you plan to use the page on a web site, since
+  search engines use this type of information to index your page. You can view
+  this information from the browser window by opening the View menu and
+  choosing Page Info.</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Title</strong>: Type the text you want to appear as the
+        window title when someone views the page through a browser. This
+        is how most web search tools locate web pages, so choose a title
+        that conveys what your page is about.</li>
+      <li><strong>Author</strong>: Type the name of the person who created the
+        document. This information is helpful to readers who locate the
+        document by using a web search tool to search on name. 
+
+        <p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you enter the Author name in
+          Composer&apos;s <a href="#new_page_settings">preferences</a>, then
+          you won&apos;t have to enter it each time you create a new page.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Description</strong>: Enter a brief description of the
+        document&apos;s contents.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="setting_page_colors_and_backgrounds">Setting Page Colours and
+  Backgrounds</h2>
+
+<p>You can change the background colour or specify a background
+  image for the page you&apos;re currently working on. These choices
+  affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing
+  the page through a browser.</p>
+
+<p>To set the colours and background for the current page, begin
+  from the Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Page Colours and Background.</li>
+  <li>Edit any of the following properties:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colours</strong>: Select this if you
+        want your page to use the colour settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
+        for text and links.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use custom colours</strong>: Select this if you want to
+        specify the colours of text and links. For each element, select a colour
+        from the Colour selection dialogue. Sample output for each type of link
+        appears in the pane on the right.</li>
+      <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Select this if you want the
+        background of your page to be an image. Type the name of the image
+        file or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard
+        drive or network. 
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
+          background colour selections.</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web
+        server so that others can view them. 
+
+        <p>Using relative URLs allows you to keep all your linked files in
+          the same place relative to each other, regardless of their location
+          on your hard disc or a web server.</p>
+
+        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a
+          full (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking
+          to images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard
+          disc).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in
+          order to enable this tickbox.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events,
+  click Advanced Edit to display the
+  <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property
+  Editor</a>.</p>
+
+<p>You can also set the <a href="#new_page_settings">default page
+  background and colours</a> for every new page you create in Composer.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#setting_page_properties">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="creating_links_in_composer">Creating Links in Composer</h1>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within
+      the Same Page</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other
+      Pages</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing
+      Links</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="creating_links_within_the_same_page">Creating Links Within the Same
+  Page</h2>
+
+<p>To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader
+  can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an
+  <em>anchor</em> (target location), and then create a link that points to the
+  anchor. Anchors are also called <em>named anchors</em>. To create an anchor,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you
+    want to create an anchor, or select some text.</li>
+  <li>Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor
+    Properties dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30
+    characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores
+    ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box already contains a
+    name.</li>
+  <li>Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the
+    anchor&apos;s location:
+    <img src="images/anchor-in-doc.gif" width="20" height="17" alt="" /></li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the object:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see
+    the Link Properties dialogue box.
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to an HTML file on your computer,
+        click Choose File to locate it.</li>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a named anchor (target), select
+        it from the list of the anchors currently available in the page.</li>
+      <li>If you&apos;re creating a link to a level heading (for example,
+        Heading 1 - Heading 6), select it from the list of headings currently
+        available in the page.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To test the link you just created, open the File
+  menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: If you did not first create named anchors, you can
+  use the Link dialogue box to create links to headings that already occur in
+  the page.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="creating_links_to_other_pages">Creating Links to Other Pages</h2>
+
+<p>You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or
+  on your workplace&apos;s network, or to remote pages on the Internet.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer to automatically
+  use relative references for links once you create them.</p>
+
+<p>To create a link to another page:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or
+    select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Define your link:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Link text</strong>: If you&apos;ve already selected an image
+        file or text before clicking the Link button, the selected text or
+        file will be entered here. Otherwise, you must enter the text that you
+        want to use as the link.</li>
+      <li><strong>Link Location</strong>: Type the local path and filename or
+        remote URL of the page you want to link to. If you&apos;re not sure of
+        the path and filename for a local file, click Choose File to look for
+        it on your hard disc or network. For remote URLs, you can copy the URL
+        from the browser&apos;s Location Bar. Alternatively, you can select a
+        named anchor or a heading in the current page that you want to link
+        to.</li>
+      <li><strong>URL is relative to page location</strong>: If ticked,
+        Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page&apos;s location.
+        This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web
+        server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to
+        keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other,
+        regardless of their location on your hard disc or a web server.
+
+        <p>Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a full
+          (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to pages
+          on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disc).</p>
+
+        <p>If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order
+          to enable this tickbox. (This tickbox is not available if you open
+          the Link Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</p>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Attach the source of this link to the message</strong>: If
+        ticked, the source of the specified link is added as an attachment to
+        the message you are sending. If cleared, just a link to the location
+        is inserted instead. (This tickbox is only available if you open the
+        Link Properties dialogue box in a message compose window.)</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit
+    to display the
+    <a href="#using_the_advanced_property_editor">Advanced Property Editor</a>.
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+  <li>To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and then click
+    the link to make sure it works as expected.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging
+  the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. For
+  example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, bookmark, or Mail
+  window and drop it onto your page. You can also right-click<span class="mac">
+  or, if you have a one-button mouse, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click</span> a link on a
+  web page and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the
+  link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties dialogue
+  box.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="using_images_as_links">Using Images as Links</h2>
+
+<p>You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in
+  your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window
+  displays the page that the image is linked to.</p>
+
+<p>To make an image behaving like a link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select an image on your page.</li>
+  <li>Click the Link button
+    <img src="images/link.gif" width="22" height="20" alt="" />
+    on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.</li>
+  <li>Use the Link Properties dialogue box to link the image to a
+    <a href="#creating_links_within_the_same_page">named anchor or heading
+    within the page</a>, or to a
+    <a href="#creating_links_to_other_pages">separate local or remote page</a>.
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: Drag and drop a linked image from the browser window
+  into a Composer window to copy both the image and the link.</p>
+
+<p><strong>Note</strong>: To remove the blue border that can appear around
+  images used as links:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the linked image.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Image and Link Properties.</li>
+  <li>In the dialogue box, select the Link tab.</li>
+  <li>Clear <q>Show border around linked image</q>.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="removing_or_discontinuing_links">Removing or Discontinuing Links</h2>
+
+<p>To remove a link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included
+  as part of the link:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.</li>
+  <li>Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#creating_links_in_composer">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+ 
+<h1 id="publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Publishing Your Pages on the Web</h1>
+
+<p>If your pages exist only on your local hard disc, you can browse your pages,
+  but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote
+  computer called a web server.</p>
+
+<p>When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your
+  pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. Most ISPs provide
+  space on their web servers for web page publishing. To find a web server
+  where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP, help desk, or system
+  administrator.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published
+      Document</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the
+      Filename or Publishing Location</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing
+      Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default
+      Publishing Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing
+      Site</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+      Problems</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="publishing_a_document">Publishing a Document</h2>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: It&apos;s best to first save or publish your page
+  before you insert links or images into it. This allows Composer to
+  automatically use relative references for links and images once you insert
+  them.</p>
+
+<p>To publish a document:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer
+    document.</li>
+  <li>When you&apos;re ready to publish the document remotely, click the
+    Publish button.
+
+    <p>If you have published this document before, Composer remembers the
+      document&apos;s publishing settings and starts publishing the document.
+      While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a publishing status
+      dialogue box.</p>
+    <ul>
+      <li>If you have never published this document before, Composer displays
+        the Settings tab in the Publish Page dialogue box so you can enter
+        information about the document&apos;s remote publishing location. See
+        <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
+        information. When you&apos;re done entering information, click Publish.
+      </li>
+      <li>If you have never saved the document, Composer displays the Publish
+        tab in the Publish Page dialogue box, so you can enter the
+        document&apos;s filename. See
+        <a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a> for more
+        information. After entering the filename, click Publish.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li>To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test the
+    page&apos;s links and make sure there are no missing images.</li>
+  <li>Continue editing the page as necessary. When you&apos;re ready to update
+    the remote page with your changes, click the Publish button.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes the
+  document&apos;s <tt>file:///</tt> URL to an <tt>http://</tt> URL to indicate
+  that you are now editing the published document. If you want to save the
+  document locally (on your computer&apos;s hard disc), click the Save button.
+  You&apos;ll be prompted to choose a filename and location on your hard disc
+  for the document.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="tips_for_avoiding_broken_links_or_missing_images">Tips for Avoiding
+  Broken Links or Missing Images</h3>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Make sure your Composer filenames end with the .html or .htm file
+    extension. Make sure your image filenames end with the .JPG, .GIF, or .PNG
+    file extension. Don&apos;t use spaces or other special symbols in your
+    filenames. Keep your filenames short and only use lowercase or uppercase
+    letters and numbers.</li>
+  <li>If your images appear as broken links when you browse a document on the
+    web server, you may have forgotten to include the images when you
+    published. Open the File menu, and choose Publish As to display the Publish
+    Page dialogue box. In the Publish tab, make sure you tick <q>Include images
+    and other files</q> and then click Publish.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more troubleshooting tips, see
+  <a href="#solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+  Problems</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="updating_a_published_document">Updating a Published Document</h2>
+
+<p>To update a published document:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
+    select the document from the list. <p>Alternatively, browse to the location
+    of the document you want to update by entering the document&apos;s HTTP
+    address (the document&apos;s web address) in the browser&apos;s
+    Location Bar.</p></li>
+  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
+  <li>When you&apos;re ready to update the remote page with your changes, click
+    Publish in Composer&apos;s toolbar.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To delete a page or image you&apos;ve published on a
+  web server, you must use an <a href="glossary.xhtml#ftp">FTP (File Transfer
+  Protocol)</a> program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create
+  subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your service
+  provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find
+  information on FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
+  provider&apos;s web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites
+  such as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename or
+  Publishing Location</h2>
+
+<p>To change a document&apos;s filename or publishing location:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then
+    select the document from the list.
+
+    <p>Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want to update
+      by entering the document&apos;s HTTP address (the document&apos;s web
+      address) in the browser&apos;s Location Bar.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Edit the document as necessary.</li>
+  <li>Open Composer&apos;s File menu and choose Publish As. Composer displays
+    the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Enter a different page title, if necessary.</li>
+  <li>Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.</li>
+  <li>From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you want to use.
+    To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. See
+    <a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a> for more
+    information.</li>
+  <li>Click Publish to save the document to the new location.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="creating_a_new_publishing_site">Creating a New Publishing Site</h2>
+
+<p>If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote location, you can
+  set up Composer to save the publishing information for each remote site you
+  use, so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you want to
+  publish.</p>
+
+<p>To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
+    displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Click New Site.</li>
+  <li>For <q>Site Name</q>, enter the nickname by which you want to refer to
+    this publishing site. 
+
+    <p>For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents
+      related to the <q>Meteor</q> project, you might want to use the site
+      name <q>Meteor</q>. Site names remind you about the types of documents
+      you publish at each site.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>Publishing address</q>, enter the complete URL provided to
+    you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This
+    URL must begin with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. 
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
+      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
+      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>HTTP address of your home page</q>, enter the complete URL
+    that you would enter in the browser to view pages at this
+    site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
+      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
+      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
+      it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>For <q>user name</q>, enter the user name you use to log in to your ISP
+    or web hosting service.</li>
+  <li>For <q>password</q>, enter the password for your user name.</li>
+  <li>Select <q>Save Password</q> to save your password securely using
+    Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to enter it each time you
+    publish pages at this site.</li>
+  <li>Click OK.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="choosing_the_default_publishing_site">Choosing the Default Publishing
+  Site</h2>
+
+<p>If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you typically use
+  only one site for most of your publishing needs, you can designate the site
+  you use most often as the default publishing site. Composer will use the
+  default publishing site for all documents that you publish, unless you
+  specifically choose an alternate site.</p>
+
+<p>Regardless of how many sites you&apos;ve set up, you can always publish a
+  document to a different site by choosing Publish As from Composer&apos;s
+  File menu. See
+  <a href="#changing_the_filename_or_publishing_location">Changing the Filename
+  or Publishing Location</a> for more information.</p>
+
+<p>To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings.
+    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Select a publishing site from the list. 
+
+    <p>If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that
+      one as the default site.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click Set as Default.</li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="deleting_a_publishing_site">Deleting a Publishing Site</h2>
+
+<p>Deleting a publishing site removes the site&apos;s settings from Composer.
+  If you later wish to publish to the site, you must re-enter the site&apos;s
+  settings.</p>
+
+<p>To delete a publishing site&apos;s settings, begin from a Composer
+  window:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer
+    displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
+  <li>Select a publishing site from the list.</li>
+  <li>Click Remove Site.
+
+    <p>Composer only removes the site&apos;s settings; the remote site itself
+      is not affected.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Click OK to confirm your changes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="solving_common_publishing_problems">Solving Common Publishing
+  Problems</h2>
+
+<p>If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing
+  Status dialogue box displays an error message that can help you
+  determine what went wrong and how to fix it.</p>
+
+<p>If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your
+  hard disc by opening Composer&apos;s File menu, and choosing Save. You
+  can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To
+  quickly locate the file later, open Composer&apos;s File menu, and
+  choose Recent Pages.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+      Settings</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+  Settings</h3>
+
+<p>To verify your publishing settings:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Close the Publishing Status dialogue box, if it is open.</li>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.</li>
+  <li>In the Publish Settings dialogue box, confirm that the site settings are
+    correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If you&apos;re not
+    sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Verify that you correctly entered the publishing
+        settings</strong>: You may have accidentally mis-typed one of the
+        settings.</li>
+      <li><strong>Verify that you entered the correct publishing
+        address</strong>: Web hosting services or ISPs may refer to the
+        publishing address as the <q>server name</q>, the <q>hostname</q>, or
+        the <q>server/host</q>. They often specify the publishing location as
+        <tt>ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>, where <tt>username</tt> is your
+        user name. 
+
+        <p>For the publishing address to be correct, you must precede the
+          publishing location with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
+          For example, the correct publishing address for the above-mentioned
+          site would be <tt>ftp://ftp.myisp.com/username</tt>.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ol>
+
+<h3 id="checking_your_filenames">Checking Your Filenames</h3>
+
+<p>Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure that the
+  filenames:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Use only numbers or lowercase or uppercase letters. While it&apos;s
+    acceptable to create filenames that use uppercase letters, you can avoid
+    potential errors in later locating the published file if you only use
+    lowercase letters in your filenames. 
+
+    <p>When you publish files to a web server, filenames become
+      case-sensitive on the web server. It may be harder for you to remember
+      files names that use only uppercase letters or that use a mix of
+      uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
+
+    <p>For example, when you try to locate a published file by typing the
+      filename&apos;s web address into the browser&apos;s Location Bar, you
+      must enter the filename exactly as you created it, using the same
+      combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>Don&apos;t use punctuation characters or spaces. Underscores ( _ )
+    or hyphens ( - ) are OK.</li>
+  <li>End with .html or .htm (for Composer filenames).</li>
+  <li>Use less than 32 characters.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="fixing_publishing_errors">Fixing Publishing Errors</h3>
+
+<p>If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the messages 
+  Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the Publishing dialogue box.
+  You can use these error messages to help determine what went wrong and what
+  to do to fix the problem.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+  <p>Error Messages:</p>
+  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#file_not_found"><tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to
+    publish.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var>
+    doesn&apos;t exist on this site or the filename <var>filename</var> is
+    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#subdir_not_found"><tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is
+    already in use by another subdirectory.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#server_not_found"><tt>The server is not available. Check your
+    connection and try again later.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#no_permission"><tt>You do not have permission to publish to this
+    location.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#offline_error"><tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon
+    near the lower-right corner of any window to go online.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#no_disk_space"><tt>There is not enough disc space available to
+    save the file <var>filename</var>.</tt></a></p>
+  <p><a href="#name_too_long"><tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too
+    long.</tt></a></p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="file_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt><var>Filename</var> not found.</tt> 
+    <p>or</p>
+    <tt><var>X</var> of <var>Y</var> files failed to publish.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: One or more image files or CSS files
+    failed to publish because Composer could not find them. Some typical
+    reasons might be:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>The file location you typed is incorrect.</li>
+    <li>The file&apos;s location on the web is not accessible.</li>
+    <li>The file&apos;s location was changed or the file was deleted or
+      moved to another location.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Look for broken images in the page you are trying to publish. Broken
+      images will appear with this icon
+      <img src="images/broken.gif" width="20" height="20" alt="" /> in the
+      page. To correct the image&apos;s address, double-click the broken
+      image to display the Image Properties dialogue box so you can enter the
+      correct address.</li>
+    <li>Remove the broken image from the page by selecting it (click once on
+      the image), and then pressing <kbd>Backspace</kbd> or <kbd>Delete</kbd>
+      on your keyboard.</li>
+    <li>If the image is unavailable because the server where the image resides
+      is inaccessible, try publishing the page at a later time.</li>
+    <li>If the missing file is a CSS file, you must first verify the correct
+      location of the CSS file. To fix the file&apos;s address in Composer,
+      click the HTML Source tab and edit the file&apos;s location in the HTML
+      source code. You should only edit the HTML source if you are familiar
+      with HTML tags.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="subdir_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The subdirectory <var>directory name</var> doesn&apos;t exist on this
+      site or the filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
+      subdirectory</tt>
+    <p>or</p>
+    <tt>The filename <var>filename</var> is already in use by another
+      subdirectory</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You specified the name of a remote
+    subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. Composer can only
+    publish to a remote subdirectory that already exists at the publishing
+    location. Or, you specified a filename that is identical to the name of an
+    existing subdirectory at the publishing site.</p>
+
+  <p>For example, in the Publish Page dialogue box, under the Publish tab:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>for <q>Site subdirectory for this page</q>, you may have typed the name
+      of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing location.</li>
+    <li>you ticked <q>Include images and other files</q>, and then you typed
+      the name of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing
+      location.</li>
+    <li>one of the files you are attempting to publish has the same name as a
+      subdirectory at the publishing site.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Use a separate FTP program if you want to create, rename, or delete
+      subdirectories at the publishing site. Ask your service provider if they
+      recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find information on
+      FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service
+      provider&apos;s web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware
+      sites such as ZDNet Downloads.</li>
+    <li>Don&apos;t use subdirectory names that end with <q>.html</q> or
+      <q>.htm</q>. Only your Composer filenames should end with <q>.html</q>
+      or <q>.htm</q>.</li>
+    <li>Subdirectory names are case-sensitive, so be sure to enter a
+      subdirectory name exactly as it appears at the publishing location.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="server_not_found"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The server is not available. Check your connection and try again
+      later.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: This error can have many causes. For
+    example:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Your publishing site settings may not be correct.</li>
+    <li>Your Internet connection may have been lost.</li>
+    <li>Your modem or other equipment that you use to connect to the Internet
+      might not be functioning correctly.</li>
+    <li>The web server that you are trying to publish to might be unavailable
+      due to a technical problem or to an unknown circumstance.</li>
+    <li>Your ISP or web hosting service may be experiencing technical
+      problems.</li>
+  </ul>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Verify that your publishing settings are correct and that you entered
+      them correctly. See
+      <a href="#verifying_your_publishing_settings">Verifying Your Publishing
+      Settings</a> for more information.</li>
+    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
+      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
+      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
+    <li>If your Internet connection is not working, verify that all hardware,
+      telephone connections, modems, and network connections are functioning
+      properly.</li>
+    <li>Use the browser to try to view a page at the web site you are
+      attempting to publish to. If you can successfully view other web sites but
+      cannot view a page at the publishing site, your ISP or web hosting
+      service may be experiencing technical problems.</li>
+    <li>Try publishing again later. Your ISP, web hosting service, or the web
+      server may be experiencing temporary technical difficulties.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="no_permission"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>You do not have permission to publish to this location.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish to a
+    location that you are not authorised to use. You can only publish to sites
+    where you have been granted access by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Verify that you entered the correct user name and password in the
+      Publishing Site Settings dialogue box, or in the Publish tab of the
+      Publish dialogue box.</li>
+    <li>Contact your ISP to find out where you can publish your pages at their
+      site.</li>
+    <li>Find a web hosting service that you can use to publish your pages. In
+      the browser, search for <q>web hosting</q>.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="offline_error"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>You are currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner
+      of any window to go online.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: You are attempting to publish, but
+    your &brandShortName; Internet connection is currently in the
+    <q>offline</q> state. Your Internet connection must be in the <q>online</q>
+    state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your pages.</p>
+
+  <p>Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by looking at
+    the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any &brandShortName;
+    window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as
+    <img src="images/offline.png" width="32" height="21" alt="" />.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Click the online/offline icon to go online. In the online state, the
+      icon should look like this:
+      <img src="images/online.png" width="32" height="20" alt="" />.</li>
+    <li>Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a
+      web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can
+      successfully view the page <tt>http://www.mozilla.org</tt>.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="no_disk_space"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>There is not enough disc space available to save the file
+      <var>filename</var>.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The remote web server&apos;s hard
+    disc is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disc space allocated
+    to you by your ISP or web hosting service.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Use a separate FTP program to delete unnecessary files at your
+      publishing site. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
+      particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP programs
+      in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s web site.
+      FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such as ZDNet
+      Downloads.</li>
+    <li>Find out from your ISP or web hosting service about increasing your
+      disc space allocation, or switch to a different service that can satisfy
+      your needs.</li>
+    <li>If the web server is located at your company or school, contact the
+      network administrator to find out if you can publish to a different
+      location that has more disc space, or if you can request that
+      additional disc space be allocated to your current publishing
+      location.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<div class="errorMessage">
+  <p id="name_too_long"><strong>Error Message</strong>:</p>
+
+  <div class="contentsBox" style="background-color: #ebebeb;">
+    <tt>The filename or subdirectory name is too long.</tt>
+  </div>
+
+  <p><strong>Error Description</strong>: The number of characters in the
+    filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web server
+    computer that you are trying to publish to.</p>
+
+  <p><strong>Possible Solutions</strong>:</p>
+
+  <ul>
+    <li>Limit the length of your filenames and subdirectory names to less than
+      32 characters. Some operating systems do not support names longer than 32
+      characters.</li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes Composer&apos;s publishing settings. For
+  information on Composer&apos;s general and new page settings, see
+  <a href="#composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#publish_settings">Publish Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h3 id="publish_page_publish">Publish Page - Publish</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want
+  to publish a document. These settings apply to the current
+  document.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page
+    dialogue box appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Publish tab.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Lists all the publishing sites you&apos;ve
+    created, so you can choose the site that you want to publish to. To
+    create a new site, click New Site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Page Title</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s page title as
+    it appears in the browser window&apos;s title bar when you view the page in
+    the browser. The document&apos;s page title also appears in your list of
+    bookmarks if you bookmark the page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Filename</strong>: Specifies the document&apos;s filename. Make
+    sure you include the .html or .htm extension in the filename.
+
+    <p><strong>Warning</strong>: If a file on the remote site you&apos;re
+      publishing to has the same filename as one you&apos;re uploading, the
+      newly uploaded file will replace the existing one. You will not be
+      asked to confirm the action.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Site subdirectory for this page</strong>: If you leave this
+    blank, Composer publishes the page to the main (root) publishing
+    directory at this site. If you want to publish the page to a remote
+    subdirectory that resides underneath the main publishing directory
+    at this site, enter the name of the subdirectory or choose it from
+    the list. Composer keeps track of the locations you type here, so
+    you can select from a list of remote locations you&apos;ve previously
+    used. Keep in mind that subdirectory names are case-sensitive.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: The site subdirectory you choose must
+      already exist at the remote server.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Include images and other files</strong>: If ticked,
+    Composer publishes any images and other files referenced by this
+    page. You can choose to publish these files to the same location as
+    the page, or else you can choose to publish these files into a
+    remote subdirectory that exists underneath the main publishing
+    directory.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><strong>Tip</strong>: To create remote subdirectories or delete
+  published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer
+  Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a
+  particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP
+  programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider&apos;s
+  web site. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such
+  as ZDNet Downloads.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="publish_page_settings">Publish Page - Settings</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login information for
+  the remote publishing site, as well as the publishing settings for the remote
+  site. These settings apply to the current document and any other files you
+  publish to this location.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, follow
+  these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page dialogue box
+    appears.</li>
+  <li>Click the Settings tab.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the nickname you want to use for
+    this publishing site. Enter a short name that will help you identify this
+    publishing site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
+    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin with
+    either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>. This name is often referred to
+    as the <q>host name</q> or the <q>host server name</q>.
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents are
+      published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter,
+      ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>HTTP address of your home page</strong>: Specifies the complete
+    address of your publishing home directory. This is the web address of the
+    home page at your web site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as
+    part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases, this
+      URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure what to
+      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log into
+    your ISP or network.</li>
+  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
+    name.</li>
+  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to encrypt and save your
+    password securely using Password Manager so that you don&apos;t have to
+    enter it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h3 id="publish_settings">Publish Settings</h3>
+
+<p>The Publish Settings dialogue box lets you create, edit, and
+  delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default
+  publishing site.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialogue box,
+  follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
+    Composer displays the Publish Settings dialogue box.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>New Site</strong>: Lets you specify settings for a new publishing
+    site. Composer adds the name of the new publishing site to the list
+    of available publishing sites.</li>
+  <li><strong>Set as Default</strong>: Sets the selected publishing site as the
+    default publishing site. Typically, the default publishing site is
+    the remote location that you most often use for publishing
+    documents. All documents you create or edit will be published to
+    the default publishing site, unless you specifically choose an
+    alternate site in the Publish Page dialogue box.
+
+    <p>To publish a document to a different remote location, open the
+      File menu and choose Publish As to choose a different publishing
+      destination.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Remove Site</strong>: Removes the selected site and its settings
+    from Composer.</li>
+  <li><strong>Site Name</strong>: Specifies the name by which you want to refer
+    to this publishing site.</li>
+  <li><strong>Publishing address</strong>: Specifies the complete URL provided
+    to you by your ISP or system administrator. This URL should begin
+    with either <tt>ftp://</tt> or <tt>http://</tt>.
+
+    <p>The publishing address specifies the location where documents
+      are published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to
+      enter, ask your ISP or system administrator.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>HTTP address of your homepage</strong>: Specifies the HTTP
+    address of your publishing home directory. Do not include a
+    filename or subdirectory as part of the URL.
+
+    <p>This URL must always begin with <tt>http://</tt>. In some cases,
+      this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure
+      what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave
+      it blank.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>User name</strong>: Specifies the user name you use to log in to
+    your ISP or network.</li>
+  <li><strong>Password</strong>: Specifies the password for your user
+    name.</li>
+  <li><strong>Save Password</strong>: Select this to save your
+    password securely using Password Manager so you don&apos;t have to enter
+    it each time you publish pages at this site.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#publishing_your_pages_on_the_web">Return to beginning of
+  section</a>]</p>
+
+<h1 id="composer_preferences">Composer Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If
+  you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>For information on Composer&apos;s publishing settings, see
+  <a href="#publishing_settings">Publishing Settings</a>.</p>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#composer">Composer</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#new_page_settings">New Page Settings</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="composer">Composer Preferences - Composer</h2>
+
+<p>Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving files and for
+  table editing. These settings apply to every document you create.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Composer category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Maximum number of pages listed</strong>: Specify the maximum
+    number of pages that are listed under Recent Pages in the File menu.</li>
+  <li><strong>Preserve original source formatting</strong>: Select this if you
+    want to preserve the original white space (extra lines, tabs, etc.) in the
+    HTML source code. Deselect this if you prefer Composer to indent and add
+    linebreaks to the code in order to make it more readable. <em>This
+    preference does not affect how your pages appear in a browser
+    window.</em></li>
+  <li><strong>Save images and other associated files when saving
+    pages</strong>: If ticked, all images, JavaScript (JS), Cascading Style
+    Sheet (CSS), and other associated files are saved in the same location as
+    the document when the document is saved for the first time or when the
+    document is saved to a new location. If cleared, only the HTML file is
+    saved.
+
+    <p>For example, when editing a remote page, this setting ensures that all
+      related files associated with the remote page will be saved locally when
+      you save the page to your hard disc.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Always show Publish dialogue when publishing pages</strong>: If
+    ticked, Composer always displays the Publish Page dialogue box when you
+    click the Publish button or choose Publish from the File menu. If not
+    ticked, Composer only displays the Publish Page dialogue box if it needs
+    more information in order to publish the page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Maintain table layout when inserting or deleting cells</strong>:
+    Select this if you want Composer to always preserve the table&apos;s
+    layout (that is, keep it in a rectangular shape) by adding cells where
+    needed. If you deselect this option, when you delete one or more cells,
+    Composer removes the cell border as well, which can result in a table with
+    empty spaces, or an outline that appears irregular due to an uneven number
+    of cells.</li>
+  <li><strong>Use CSS styles instead of HTML elements and attributes</strong>:
+    Enables the use of Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) formatting in your Composer
+    documents. With this preference enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
+    formatting with CSS inline styles for elements.
+
+    <p>If this preference is not enabled, Composer generates HTML 4.01
+      formatting, but does not use CSS styles.</p>
+
+    <p>Compared to HTML, HTML with CSS formatting is more portable, more
+      maintainable, and more compatible when viewed with different browsers.
+      If you enable this preference and then edit a document created without
+      CSS, Composer replaces the edited elements with CSS styles.</p>
+
+    <p>If you enable CSS styles, you can choose a text highlight colour for
+      selected text using the text highlight colour button on the Format
+      toolbar. You can also choose a colour background for any element on the
+      page. (These features are not available if this preference is not
+      enabled.)</p>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong><kbd class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> in a
+     paragraph always creates a new paragraph</strong>: If selected, a new
+     paragraph will be added everytime you press the <kbd class="mac">Return
+     </kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key inside a paragraph. If
+     deselected, a linebreak will be added when you press the <kbd
+     class="mac">Return</kbd><kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd> key.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="new_page_settings">Composer Preferences - New Page Settings</h2>
+
+<p>New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colours and
+  background images that apply to every document you create.</p>
+
+<p>If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these
+  steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Double-click the Composer category and click New Page Settings.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Author</strong>: Enter your name. This will add your name to the
+    HTML source code for each new page you create.</li>
+  <li><strong>Reader&apos;s default colours</strong>: Select this if you always
+    want your pages to use the colour settings from the viewer&apos;s browser
+    for text and link elements.</li>
+  <li><strong>Use custom colours</strong>: Select this if you always want to
+    specify the colours that are applied to text and link elements. Then for
+    each element, select a colour by clicking the colour button next to each
+    element.</li>
+  <li><strong>Background image</strong>: Type the location and name of an image
+    file, or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard disc or
+    network. 
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Background images are tiled and override
+      background colour.</p>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and
+  choose Page Title and Properties.</p>
+
+<p>To change the page colours and background image for an individual page: Open
+  the Format menu and choose Page Colours and Background.</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#composer_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<p>&copyright.string;</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
--- a/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml
@@ -1,510 +1,507 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
-  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
-  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
-  %brandDTD;
-]>
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
-<head>
-<title>&brandShortName; Advanced Preferences Help</title>
-<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
-  type="text/css"/>
-</head>
-<body>
-
-<h1 id="advanced_preferences">Advanced Preferences</h1>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are
-  not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#advanced">Advanced</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#scripts_and_plugins">Scripts &amp; Plugins</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#keyboard_navigation">Keyboard Navigation</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#cache">Cache</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#proxies">Proxies</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#http_networking">HTTP Networking</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#software_installation">Software Installation</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#mouse_wheel">Mouse Wheel</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#dom_inspector">DOM Inspector</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="advanced">Advanced Preferences - Advanced</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to enable or disable
-  Java:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Enable Java</strong>: Select this to allow &brandShortName; to
-    interpret pages containing Java. Java is used on some Web page to
-    incorporate interactive and multimedia content.</li>
-  <li class="unix"><strong>Use Preferences from System</strong>: Select this to
-    use the already set system preferences, overriding &brandShortName;&apos;
-    ones.
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="scripts_and_plugins">Advanced Preferences - Scripts &amp;
-  Plugins</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences
-  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Scripts &amp; Plugins. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how
-  JavaScript and plugins are used:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Enable JavaScript for</strong>: Select these tickboxes to turn
-    JavaScript on:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Browser</strong>: Toggles JavaScript for web pages opened
-        in the browser.</li>
-      <li><strong>Mail &amp; Newsgroups</strong>: Toggles JavaScript for web
-        pages opened in Mail &amp; Newsgroups.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Allow scripts to</strong>: Select these tickboxes to control
-    how JavaScript can be used:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Move or resize existing windows</strong>: Allows open windows
-        to be resized or moved.</li>
-      <li><strong>Raise or lower windows</strong>: Allows windows to be placed
-        under or on top of other windows.</li>
-      <li><strong>Hide the status bar</strong>: Allows the status bar to be
-        hidden.</li>
-      <li><strong>Change status bar text</strong>: Allows status bar text to be
-        changed, such as in scrolling text in the status bar.</li>
-      <li><strong>Change images</strong>: Allows images to be changed or
-        animated, such as in image rollovers (images that change when the mouse
-        cursor is placed over them).</li>
-      <li><strong>Disable or replace context menus</strong>: Allows right-click
-        menus<span class="mac"> or, if you&apos;re using a one-button mouse,
-        <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click menus</span> to be replaced or disabled by
-        webpages.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Enable Plugins for</strong>: Tick this box to control how
-    plugins are used:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Mail &amp; Newsgroups</strong>: Allows plugins to be used in
-        Mail &amp; Newsgroups.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>When additional plugins are required</strong>: Tick this
-    box if you want to be informed whenever a web site requires additional
-    plugins:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Display a notification bar at the top of the content
-        area</strong>: When a web site requires a plugin which is not installed,
-        a notification bar will be displayed above the web site content area.
-        From the bar you will be able to download and install the missing
-        plugin.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>For more information about plugins, see
-  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and Downloads</a>.
-</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="keyboard_navigation">Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Keyboard Navigation preferences
-  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Keyboard Navigation. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Keyboard Navigation preferences panel allows you to control how you use
-  the keyboard to <span class="noMac">navigate and </span>search for text in
-  web pages:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li class="noMac"><strong>Links</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd>
-    or <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between links.</li>
-  <li class="noMac"><strong>Buttons, radio buttons, tick boxes, and selection
-    lists</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd> or
-    <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between buttons, radio buttons, tick
-    boxes, and selection lists.</li>
-  <li><strong>Find automatically when typing within a web page</strong>: If
-    checked, typing text in a web page automatically activates Find As You Type
-    and locates the text you typed (if it exists in the page). Choose whether
-    you want typing to find any text in the page or links only. If unchecked,
-    you must choose Find Links As You Type or Find Text As You Type from the
-    Edit menu before typing the text you want to find.</li>
-  <li><strong>Play a sound when typed text isn&apos;t found</strong>: If
-    checked, Find As You Type plays a sound when the typed text isn&apos;t
-    found in the web page.</li>
-  <li><strong>Clear the current search after a few seconds of
-    inactivity</strong>: If checked, cancels the search after a few seconds of
-    keyboard inactivity.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="cache">Advanced Preferences - Cache</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are
-    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the &brandShortName; memory
-  and disc cache:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Size</strong>: Type in the amount of disc cache you want to
-    allocate for &brandShortName;. Disc cache is saved to your hard disc
-    (drive) and can be used again even if you have turned your computer
-    off.</li>
-  <li><strong>Clear Cache</strong>: Click this to clear the disc cache.</li>
-  <li><strong>Cache Folder</strong>: Shows the current location of the disc
-    cache folder 
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Choose Folder</strong>: Click this to choose a folder
-        location for the disc cache.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Compare the page in the cache to the page on the
-    network</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Every time I view the page</strong>: Select this if you want
-        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache every time you view
-        it.</li>
-      <li><strong>When the page is out of date</strong>: Select this if you
-        want &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache when the page
-        is determined by the server to have expired.</li>
-      <li><strong>Once per session</strong>: Select this if you want
-        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache once for each time
-        you start &brandShortName;.</li>
-      <li><strong>Never</strong>: Select this if you do not want
-        &brandShortName; to compare cached information to the network.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Prefetch web pages when idle, so that links in web pages
-    designed for prefetching can load faster</strong>: Select this to decrease
-    the time it takes to load web pages when you click a link in a web page
-    that uses prefetching. For more information about Link Prefetching, see the
-    online
-    <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/projects/netlib/Link_Prefetching_FAQ.html">Link
-    Prefetching FAQ</a>.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="proxies">Advanced Preferences - Proxies</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are
-    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up &brandShortName; to use a
-  <a href="glossary.xhtml#proxy">proxy</a>:</p>
-
-<p><strong>Before you start</strong>: Ask your network administrator if you
-  have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the
-  proxy.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Direct connection to the Internet</strong>: Choose this if you
-    don&apos;t want to use a proxy.</li>
-  <li><strong>Automatically discover the proxy configuration</strong>: Choose
-    this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically detect and configure the
-    proxy settings, using the <a href="glossary.xhtml#wpad">WPAD protocol</a>.</li>
-  <li><strong>Automatic proxy configuration URL</strong>: Choose this if you
-    have a proxy configuration file or URL, then enter the configuration
-    URL.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Reload</strong>: Click this to reload the configuration file.
-
-        <p>For more information about Automatic Proxy Configuration, see the
-          online
-          <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/catalog/end-user/customizing/enduserPAC.html">End
-          User Guide to Proxy AutoConfiguration</a>.</p>
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Manual proxy configuration</strong>: Choose this if you
-    don&apos;t have a proxy location (URL), or the automatic proxy discovery
-    was unable to setup the proxy settings correctly.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address of
-        the proxy server.</li>
-      <li><strong>Port</strong>: Enter the port number in the Port field. Click
-        on <q>Advanced</q> to set
-        <a href="#advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</a></li>
-      <li><strong>No Proxy for</strong>: Type the domains and/or IP addresses
-        that you do not want to use a proxy for. Separate each entry with a
-        comma. (Example: <kbd>.mozilla.org, .net.nz, 192.168.1.0/24</kbd>.)
-      </li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<h3 id="advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</h3>
-
-<p>If you want to use different proxies for different protocols or need to use
-  a SOCKS proxy:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>HTTP Proxy</strong>, <strong>SSL Proxy</strong>,
-    <strong>FTP Proxy</strong>, <strong>Gopher Proxy</strong>: Enter the name
-    or numeric IP address of the proxy server. Type the port in the Port fields.
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: If you&apos;re using the same settings
-      for all types of proxies, click on <q>Use HTTP Proxy settings
-      for all protocols</q>.</p>
-
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>SOCKS Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address
-    of the proxy server. Enter the port number in the Port field. 
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>SOCKS v4, SOCKS v5</strong>: When entering a SOCKS Proxy,
-        select <q>SOCKS v4</q> or <q>SOCKS v5</q>, depending on what version
-        of <a href="glossary.xhtml#socks">SOCKS</a> is used for the proxy.</li>
-      <li><strong>Use for resolving hostnames</strong>: Select this to
-        use the SOCKS Proxy for resolving hostnames. This is
-        recommended for SOCKS v5 proxies.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="http_networking">Advanced Preferences - HTTP Networking</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the HTTP Networking preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click HTTP Networking. (If no subcategories
-    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The HTTP Networking preferences panel is used to configure HTTP-based
-  networking:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Direct Connection Options, Proxy Connection Options</strong>:
-    Choose the HTTP version and options for direct and proxy connections.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.0</strong>: Choose this to use the original
-        version of HTTP, standardised in 1996.</li>
-      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.1</strong>: Choose this to use the new version of
-        HTTP, which offers performance enhancements, including more efficient
-        use of HTTP connections, better support for client-side caching,
-        multiple HTTP requests (pipelining), and more refined control over
-        cache expiration and replacement policies.</li>
-      <li><strong>Enable Keep-Alive</strong>: Select this to keep a connection
-        open to make additional HTTP requests, increasing speed.</li>
-      <li><strong>Enable Pipelining</strong>: Select this to
-        enable pipelining, which allows for more than one HTTP request to be
-        sent to the server at once, reducing delays loading web pages.
-
-        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Pipelining is only available with 
-          HTTP 1.1.</p></li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="software_installation">Advanced Preferences - Software
-  Installation</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences
-  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable software
-  installation and update notification:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Allow web sites to install extensions and updates</strong>:
-    Select this if you want to allow web sites to install extensions and
-    updates to be used with &brandShortName;. You will be prompted before each
-    installation.</li>
-  <li><strong>Allowed Sites</strong>: Click this to open the Allowed Sites
-    dialogue box, where you can view and edit the list of web sites that you
-    want to allow to install software:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Allow</strong>: Click this to add a typed web site to the
-        list of allowed sites.</li>
-      <li><strong>Remove Site</strong>: Click this to remove a selected web
-        site.</li>
-      <li><strong>Remove All Sites</strong>: Click this to remove all of the
-        web sites in the current list.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Automatically check for updates to</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>&brandShortName;</strong>: Select this to be notified when
-        new versions of &brandShortName; are available. Your personal
-        information is not shared when verifying your version of
-        &brandShortName;. Choose whether you want &brandShortName; to do a
-        <strong>daily</strong> or a <strong>weekly</strong> check for new
-        versions.</li>
-      <li><strong>Installed add-ons</strong>: Select this to be notified when a
-        new version of one of your installed add-ons is available. Choose
-        whether you want &brandShortName; to do a <strong>daily</strong> or a
-        <strong>weekly</strong> check for new versions.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Add-on Manager</strong>: Click this to open the
-    Add-on Manager, where you can view and manage all your installed
-    extensions and themes.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="mouse_wheel">Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories
-    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel
-  on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in &brandShortName;.
-  Modern mice may have two wheels or a button that can be used to switch the
-  scroll direction of the wheel. The behaviour for the vertical wheel function
-  is set in the upper panel <strong>Vertical scrolling</strong> while the 
-  horizontal mode is controlled by the lower panel <strong>Horizontal
-  scrolling</strong>.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Select <q>No modifier key</q> or select a key that you want to use
-    along with the mouse wheel. Use the tickboxes below to configure mouse
-    wheel behaviour:
-    
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Scroll the document by</strong>: Choose this to scroll the
-        document by the number of lines (or characters for horizontal movement)
-        typed in the field.
-        <ul>
-          <li><strong>Use system default</strong>: Choose this to use your
-            system&apos;s default setting&mdash;the number of lines (characters)
-            you may have previously entered will be overridden.</li>
-        </ul>
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Scroll a page up (left) or a page down (right)</strong>:
-        Choose this to scroll up or down one page at a time. This setting allows
-        faster, but less accurate scrolling through a page with your mouse
-        wheel.</li>
-      <li><strong>Move back and forward in the browsing history</strong>:
-        Choose this to use the mouse wheel to navigate back or forward to
-        previous pages you&apos;ve visited.</li>
-      <li><strong>Make the text larger or smaller</strong>: Choose this to use
-        the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the size of text on a web page.
-        This setting can help you better read a page, or make text fit on the
-        screen.</li>
-    </ul>
-
-    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Each modifier key can be assigned to a different
-      function.</p>
-  </li>
-  <li>If your mouse does not have a mode for horizontal scrolling, any setting
-    in the lower panel <strong>Horizontal scrolling</strong> will be ignored.
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="dom_inspector">Advanced Preferences - DOM Inspector</h2>
-
-<p>DOM Inspector is an optional <a href="developer_tools.xhtml">Web development
-  component</a>. This section describes how to use its preferences panel.
-  If you are not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Advanced category, click DOM Inspector. (If no subcategories are
-    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>When you select an element, DOM Inspector can automatically highlight it by
-  flashing it or its border:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Blink Selected Element</strong>: Tick this option to enable the
-    highlighting of an element that you select. By default, a flashing border
-    will appear around the element.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Border Colour</strong>: Select the colour of the border around
-        the element.</li>
-      <li><strong>Border Width</strong>: Enter the width of the border around
-        the element.</li>
-      <li><strong>Blink Duration</strong>: Enter the length of time
-      (in milliseconds) for which you want the flashing to occur.</li>
-      <li><strong>Blink Speed</strong>: Enter the time interval
-        (in milliseconds) between the flashes.</li>
-      <li><strong>Invert Colour</strong>: Tick this option to paint the
-        selected element with the inverted border colour. This will cause the
-        whole element&mdash;including its border&mdash;to flash.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>&copyright.string;</p>
-
-</body>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
+  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
+  %brandDTD;
+]>
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<title>&brandShortName; Advanced Preferences Help</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
+  type="text/css"/>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<h1 id="advanced_preferences">Advanced Preferences</h1>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are
+  not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
+  <ul>
+    <li><a href="#advanced">Advanced</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#scripts_and_plugins">Scripts &amp; Plugins</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#keyboard_navigation">Keyboard Navigation</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#cache">Cache</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#proxies">Proxies</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#http_networking">HTTP Networking</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#software_installation">Software Installation</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#mouse_wheel">Mouse Wheel</a></li>
+    <li><a href="#dom_inspector">DOM Inspector</a></li>
+  </ul>
+</div>
+
+<h2 id="advanced">Advanced Preferences - Advanced</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Click the Advanced category.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to enable or disable
+  Java:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Enable Java</strong>: Select this to allow &brandShortName; to
+    interpret pages containing Java. Java is used on some Web page to
+    incorporate interactive and multimedia content.</li>
+  <li class="unix"><strong>Use Preferences from System</strong>: Select this to
+    use the already set system preferences, overriding &brandShortName;&apos;
+    ones.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="scripts_and_plugins">Advanced Preferences - Scripts &amp;
+  Plugins</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Scripts &amp; Plugins. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Scripts &amp; Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how
+  JavaScript and plugins are used:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Enable JavaScript for</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Browser</strong>: Select this to turn on JavaScript for web
+        pages opened in the browser.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Allow scripts to</strong>: Select these tickboxes to control
+    how JavaScript can be used:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Move or resize existing windows</strong>: Allows open windows
+        to be resized or moved.</li>
+      <li><strong>Raise or lower windows</strong>: Allows windows to be placed
+        under or on top of other windows.</li>
+      <li><strong>Hide the status bar</strong>: Allows the status bar to be
+        hidden.</li>
+      <li><strong>Change status bar text</strong>: Allows status bar text to be
+        changed, such as in scrolling text in the status bar.</li>
+      <li><strong>Change images</strong>: Allows images to be changed or
+        animated, such as in image rollovers (images that change when the mouse
+        cursor is placed over them).</li>
+      <li><strong>Disable or replace context menus</strong>: Allows right-click
+        menus<span class="mac"> or, if you&apos;re using a one-button mouse,
+        <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-click menus</span> to be replaced or disabled by
+        webpages.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Enable Plugins for</strong>: Tick this box to control how
+    plugins are used:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Mail &amp; Newsgroups</strong>: Allows plugins to be used in
+        Mail &amp; Newsgroups.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>When additional plugins are required</strong>: Tick this
+    box if you want to be informed whenever a web site requires additional
+    plugins:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Display a notification bar at the top of the content
+        area</strong>: When a web site requires a plugin which is not installed,
+        a notification bar will be displayed above the web site content area.
+        From the bar you will be able to download and install the missing
+        plugin.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For more information about plugins, see
+  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and Downloads</a>.
+</p>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="keyboard_navigation">Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Keyboard Navigation preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Keyboard Navigation. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Keyboard Navigation preferences panel allows you to control how you use
+  the keyboard to <span class="noMac">navigate and </span>search for text in
+  web pages:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li class="noMac"><strong>Links</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd>
+    or <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between links.</li>
+  <li class="noMac"><strong>Buttons, radio buttons, tick boxes, and selection
+    lists</strong>: If checked, pressing <kbd>Tab</kbd> or
+    <kbd>Shift</kbd>+<kbd>Tab</kbd> moves between buttons, radio buttons, tick
+    boxes, and selection lists.</li>
+  <li><strong>Find automatically when typing within a web page</strong>: If
+    checked, typing text in a web page automatically activates Find As You Type
+    and locates the text you typed (if it exists in the page). Choose whether
+    you want typing to find any text in the page or links only. If unchecked,
+    you must choose Find Links As You Type or Find Text As You Type from the
+    Edit menu before typing the text you want to find.</li>
+  <li><strong>Play a sound when typed text isn&apos;t found</strong>: If
+    checked, Find As You Type plays a sound when the typed text isn&apos;t
+    found in the web page.</li>
+  <li><strong>Clear the current search after a few seconds of
+    inactivity</strong>: If checked, cancels the search after a few seconds of
+    keyboard inactivity.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="cache">Advanced Preferences - Cache</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the &brandShortName; memory
+  and disc cache:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Size</strong>: Type in the amount of disc cache you want to
+    allocate for &brandShortName;. Disc cache is saved to your hard disc
+    (drive) and can be used again even if you have turned your computer
+    off.</li>
+  <li><strong>Clear Cache</strong>: Click this to clear the disc cache.</li>
+  <li><strong>Cache Folder</strong>: Shows the current location of the disc
+    cache folder 
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Choose Folder</strong>: Click this to choose a folder
+        location for the disc cache.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Compare the page in the cache to the page on the
+    network</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Every time I view the page</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache every time you view
+        it.</li>
+      <li><strong>When the page is out of date</strong>: Select this if you
+        want &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache when the page
+        is determined by the server to have expired.</li>
+      <li><strong>Once per session</strong>: Select this if you want
+        &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache once for each time
+        you start &brandShortName;.</li>
+      <li><strong>Never</strong>: Select this if you do not want
+        &brandShortName; to compare cached information to the network.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Prefetch web pages when idle, so that links in web pages
+    designed for prefetching can load faster</strong>: Select this to decrease
+    the time it takes to load web pages when you click a link in a web page
+    that uses prefetching. For more information about Link Prefetching, see the
+    online
+    <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/projects/netlib/Link_Prefetching_FAQ.html">Link
+    Prefetching FAQ</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="proxies">Advanced Preferences - Proxies</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up &brandShortName; to use a
+  <a href="glossary.xhtml#proxy">proxy</a>:</p>
+
+<p><strong>Before you start</strong>: Ask your network administrator if you
+  have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the
+  proxy.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Direct connection to the Internet</strong>: Choose this if you
+    don&apos;t want to use a proxy.</li>
+  <li><strong>Automatically discover the proxy configuration</strong>: Choose
+    this if you want &brandShortName; to automatically detect and configure the
+    proxy settings, using the <a href="glossary.xhtml#wpad">WPAD protocol</a>.</li>
+  <li><strong>Automatic proxy configuration URL</strong>: Choose this if you
+    have a proxy configuration file or URL, then enter the configuration
+    URL.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Reload</strong>: Click this to reload the configuration file.
+
+        <p>For more information about Automatic Proxy Configuration, see the
+          online
+          <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/catalog/end-user/customizing/enduserPAC.html">End
+          User Guide to Proxy AutoConfiguration</a>.</p>
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Manual proxy configuration</strong>: Choose this if you
+    don&apos;t have a proxy location (URL), or the automatic proxy discovery
+    was unable to setup the proxy settings correctly.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address of
+        the proxy server.</li>
+      <li><strong>Port</strong>: Enter the port number in the Port field. Click
+        on <q>Advanced</q> to set
+        <a href="#advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</a></li>
+      <li><strong>No Proxy for</strong>: Type the domains and/or IP addresses
+        that you do not want to use a proxy for. Separate each entry with a
+        comma. (Example: <kbd>.mozilla.org, .net.nz, 192.168.1.0/24</kbd>.)
+      </li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3 id="advanced_proxy_preferences">Advanced Proxy Preferences</h3>
+
+<p>If you want to use different proxies for different protocols or need to use
+  a SOCKS proxy:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>HTTP Proxy</strong>, <strong>SSL Proxy</strong>,
+    <strong>FTP Proxy</strong>, <strong>Gopher Proxy</strong>: Enter the name
+    or numeric IP address of the proxy server. Type the port in the Port fields.
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: If you&apos;re using the same settings
+      for all types of proxies, click on <q>Use HTTP Proxy settings
+      for all protocols</q>.</p>
+
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>SOCKS Proxy</strong>: Enter the name or numeric IP address
+    of the proxy server. Enter the port number in the Port field. 
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>SOCKS v4, SOCKS v5</strong>: When entering a SOCKS Proxy,
+        select <q>SOCKS v4</q> or <q>SOCKS v5</q>, depending on what version
+        of <a href="glossary.xhtml#socks">SOCKS</a> is used for the proxy.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use for resolving hostnames</strong>: Select this to
+        use the SOCKS Proxy for resolving hostnames. This is
+        recommended for SOCKS v5 proxies.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="http_networking">Advanced Preferences - HTTP Networking</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the HTTP Networking preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click HTTP Networking. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The HTTP Networking preferences panel is used to configure HTTP-based
+  networking:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Direct Connection Options, Proxy Connection Options</strong>:
+    Choose the HTTP version and options for direct and proxy connections.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.0</strong>: Choose this to use the original
+        version of HTTP, standardised in 1996.</li>
+      <li><strong>Use HTTP 1.1</strong>: Choose this to use the new version of
+        HTTP, which offers performance enhancements, including more efficient
+        use of HTTP connections, better support for client-side caching,
+        multiple HTTP requests (pipelining), and more refined control over
+        cache expiration and replacement policies.</li>
+      <li><strong>Enable Keep-Alive</strong>: Select this to keep a connection
+        open to make additional HTTP requests, increasing speed.</li>
+      <li><strong>Enable Pipelining</strong>: Select this to
+        enable pipelining, which allows for more than one HTTP request to be
+        sent to the server at once, reducing delays loading web pages.
+
+        <p><strong>Note</strong>: Pipelining is only available with 
+          HTTP 1.1.</p></li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="software_installation">Advanced Preferences - Software
+  Installation</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences
+  panel. If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no
+    subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable software
+  installation and update notification:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Allow web sites to install extensions and updates</strong>:
+    Select this if you want to allow web sites to install extensions and
+    updates to be used with &brandShortName;. You will be prompted before each
+    installation.</li>
+  <li><strong>Allowed Sites</strong>: Click this to open the Allowed Sites
+    dialogue box, where you can view and edit the list of web sites that you
+    want to allow to install software:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Allow</strong>: Click this to add a typed web site to the
+        list of allowed sites.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remove Site</strong>: Click this to remove a selected web
+        site.</li>
+      <li><strong>Remove All Sites</strong>: Click this to remove all of the
+        web sites in the current list.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Automatically check for updates to</strong>:
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>&brandShortName;</strong>: Select this to be notified when
+        new versions of &brandShortName; are available. Your personal
+        information is not shared when verifying your version of
+        &brandShortName;. Choose whether you want &brandShortName; to do a
+        <strong>daily</strong> or a <strong>weekly</strong> check for new
+        versions.</li>
+      <li><strong>Installed add-ons</strong>: Select this to be notified when a
+        new version of one of your installed add-ons is available. Choose
+        whether you want &brandShortName; to do a <strong>daily</strong> or a
+        <strong>weekly</strong> check for new versions.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+  <li><strong>Add-on Manager</strong>: Click this to open the
+    Add-on Manager, where you can view and manage all your installed
+    extensions and themes.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="mouse_wheel">Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel</h2>
+
+<p>This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If
+  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories
+    are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel
+  on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in &brandShortName;.
+  Modern mice may have two wheels or a button that can be used to switch the
+  scroll direction of the wheel. The behaviour for the vertical wheel function
+  is set in the upper panel <strong>Vertical scrolling</strong> while the 
+  horizontal mode is controlled by the lower panel <strong>Horizontal
+  scrolling</strong>.</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Select <q>No modifier key</q> or select a key that you want to use
+    along with the mouse wheel. Use the tickboxes below to configure mouse
+    wheel behaviour:
+    
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Scroll the document by</strong>: Choose this to scroll the
+        document by the number of lines (or characters for horizontal movement)
+        typed in the field.
+        <ul>
+          <li><strong>Use system default</strong>: Choose this to use your
+            system&apos;s default setting&mdash;the number of lines (characters)
+            you may have previously entered will be overridden.</li>
+        </ul>
+      </li>
+      <li><strong>Scroll a page up (left) or a page down (right)</strong>:
+        Choose this to scroll up or down one page at a time. This setting allows
+        faster, but less accurate scrolling through a page with your mouse
+        wheel.</li>
+      <li><strong>Move back and forward in the browsing history</strong>:
+        Choose this to use the mouse wheel to navigate back or forward to
+        previous pages you&apos;ve visited.</li>
+      <li><strong>Make the text larger or smaller</strong>: Choose this to use
+        the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the size of text on a web page.
+        This setting can help you better read a page, or make text fit on the
+        screen.</li>
+    </ul>
+
+    <p><strong>Note</strong>: Each modifier key can be assigned to a different
+      function.</p>
+  </li>
+  <li>If your mouse does not have a mode for horizontal scrolling, any setting
+    in the lower panel <strong>Horizontal scrolling</strong> will be ignored.
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>[<a href="#advanced_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
+
+<h2 id="dom_inspector">Advanced Preferences - DOM Inspector</h2>
+
+<p>DOM Inspector is an optional <a href="developer_tools.xhtml">Web development
+  component</a>. This section describes how to use its preferences panel.
+  If you are not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
+
+<ol>
+  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
+    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
+  <li>Under the Advanced category, click DOM Inspector. (If no subcategories are
+    visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>When you select an element, DOM Inspector can automatically highlight it by
+  flashing it or its border:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><strong>Blink Selected Element</strong>: Tick this option to enable the
+    highlighting of an element that you select. By default, a flashing border
+    will appear around the element.
+    <ul>
+      <li><strong>Border Colour</strong>: Select the colour of the border around
+        the element.</li>
+      <li><strong>Border Width</strong>: Enter the width of the border around
+        the element.</li>
+      <li><strong>Blink Duration</strong>: Enter the length of time
+      (in milliseconds) for which you want the flashing to occur.</li>
+      <li><strong>Blink Speed</strong>: Enter the time interval
+        (in milliseconds) between the flashes.</li>
+      <li><strong>Invert Colour</strong>: Tick this option to paint the
+        selected element with the inverted border colour. This will cause the
+        whole element&mdash;including its border&mdash;to flash.</li>
+    </ul>
+  </li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>&copyright.string;</p>
+
+</body>
+</html>
--- a/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml
+++ b/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml
@@ -1,631 +1,663 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
-  "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"[
-  <!ENTITY % brandDTD SYSTEM "chrome://branding/locale/brand.dtd" >
-  %brandDTD;
-]>
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
-<head>
-<title>&brandShortName; Browser Preferences Help</title>
-<link rel="stylesheet" href="helpFileLayout.css"
-  type="text/css"/>
-</head>
-<body>
-
-<h1 id="navigator_preferences">Browser Preferences</h1>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Browser preference panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Choose Browser.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<div class="contentsBox">In this section:
-  <ul>
-    <li><a href="#navigator">Browser</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#history">History</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#languages">Languages</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#helper_applications">Helper Applications</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#location_bar">Location Bar</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#internet_search">Internet Search</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#tabbed_browsing">Tabbed Browsing</a></li>
-    <li><a href="#downloads">Downloads</a></li>
-  </ul>
-</div>
-
-<h2 id="navigator">Browser Preferences - Browser</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the main browser preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Click the Browser category.</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Browser preferences panel allows you to customise certain aspects of
-  the browser.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Display on</strong>: Use the drop-down list in combination with
-    the tickboxes to control what will be displayed at startup or when you
-    open a new window or tab:
-    <ol>
-      <li>
-        <ul>
-          <li>Select <strong>Browser Startup</strong> to set what the browser
-            will display at startup.</li>
-          <li>Select <strong>New Window</strong> to set what will be displayed
-            when opening a new browser window.</li>
-          <li>Select <strong>New Tab</strong> to set what will be displayed
-            when opening a new tab.</li>
-        </ul>
-      </li>
-      <li>Select one of the following tickboxes:
-        <ul>
-          <li><strong>Blank page</strong>: Causes the browser to display a blank
-            page.</li>
-          <li><strong>Home page</strong>: Causes the browser to load your home
-            page (specified below).</li>
-          <li><strong>Last page visited</strong>: Causes the browser to load the
-            page you were viewing right before you last exited
-            &brandShortName;.</li>
-        </ul>
-      </li>
-    </ol>
-  </li>
-  <li class="win"><strong>Default Browser</strong>: Allows you to set
-    &brandShortName; as the default browser or shows you that it is.
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Set Default Browser</strong>: Unless it is greyed out, click
-        this to set &brandShortName; as your default browser.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Home Page</strong>: In the field, type the web page you want as
-    your home page or do one of the following:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Use Current Page</strong>: Click this to use the web page
-        currently displayed in the browser as your home page.</li>
-      <li><strong>Use Current Group</strong>: If you have two or more browser
-        tabs open, click this to set them as your Home Page Group (a group of
-        tabs that are opened as your home page). After clicking this button,
-        the message <q>Home Page Group is Set</q> appears in the location
-        field.
-        
-        <p><strong>Caution</strong>: If you edit the field after clicking Use
-          Current Group, your Home Page Group will be lost.</p>
-      
-      </li>
-      <li><strong>Restore Default</strong>: Click this to revert to the
-        the default home page.</li>
-      <li><strong>Choose File</strong>: Click this to locate a file on disc
-        that you want to load as your home page.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Select the buttons you want to see in the toolbars</strong>:
-    Select any of the available tickboxes to see them on your
-    toolbars.
-
-    <p>The Go, Search, and Print buttons appear in the Navigation Toolbar near
-      the upper-right corner of the browser window. All other buttons appear
-      in the Personal Toolbar. For information about adding your own bookmarks
-      to this toolbar, see
-      <a href="customize_help.xhtml#personal_toolbar">Personal
-      Toolbar</a>.</p>
-
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="history">Browser Preferences - History</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the History preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span>menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Browser category, click History. (If no subcategories are
-    visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The History preferences panel allows you to configure the history settings
-  for the browser.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Browsing History</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Clear History</strong>: Click this to delete the list of
-        sites visited.</li>
-      <li><strong>Always remember visited pages for at least [__]
-        days</strong>: Type the minimum number of days for which
-        &brandShortName; should remember pages you have previously visited.
-        Unless you manually delete entries from the history, &brandShortName;
-        will always remember visited pages for at least as many days as you
-        specify here, no matter what the other Browsing History preferences
-        say. After that time, &brandShortName; may delete entries from the
-        history, depending on the next two preferences.</li>
-      <li><strong>Remember visited pages for up to [__] days</strong>: Type the
-        maximum number of days you want &brandShortName; to keep track of the
-        web pages you have previously visited. For example, if you set this
-        number to 180 days, pages 180 days old or less will be kept in the
-        history list unless you manually delete them from the history or the
-        maximum number of visited pages (see next point) has been reached.</li>
-      <li><strong>Remember up to [__] visited pages</strong>: Type the maximum
-        number of visited pages &brandShortName; should remember. When the
-        actual number of visited pages exceeds the number specified here,
-        &brandShortName; will delete as many of the oldest history entries as
-        needed to get down to that number again.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Location Bar History</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Clear Location Bar</strong>: Click this to clear the list of
-        sites in the Location bar menu.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>For more information about history in &brandShortName;, see
-  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#retracing_your_steps">Retracing Your Steps</a>.</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="languages">Browser Preferences - Languages</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Languages preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Browser category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are
-    visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Languages preferences panel allows you to choose the languages and
-  character encoding for displaying web pages and choose if and how your typing
-  is spell checked:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Languages for Web Pages</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Move Up / Move Down</strong>: Click one of these buttons to
-        move a selected language up or down, which sets the order of preference
-        for the listed languages.</li>
-      <li><strong>Add</strong>: Click this to add additional languages for
-        displaying web pages. In the dialogue, select a language from the list.
-        If you want to add a language that is not in the list, type a language
-        code (both two- and three-letter codes can be used) in the field below
-        the list. See the online document
-        <a href="http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php">Codes
-        for the Representation of Names of Languages</a> for a complete list of
-        language codes. Click OK to close the dialogue and save your
-        changes.</li>
-      <li><strong>Remove</strong>: Click this to remove a selected
-        language.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Character Encoding</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Default Character Encoding</strong>: Use the drop-down list
-        to select the character encoding you want for displaying web
-        pages.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Spelling</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>When typing check my spelling</strong>: Use the drop-down
-        list to select if and how your typing is spell checked.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="helper_applications">Browser Preferences - Helper Applications</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Helper Applications preferences panel.
-  If you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Browser category, click Helper Applications. (If no
-    subcategories are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Helper Applications preferences panel lets you choose applications and
-  other handlers to handle different types of content (e.g. PDF documents).
-  It shows you a list of content types and lets you select a handler for each
-  type. To filter the list, use the search field. Text entered in there will
-  narrow the list to entries containing that text either in the type description
-  or the currently selected action.</p>
-<p>You can choose a local application to handle any type. For some types, you
-  can also choose a web application to handle the type, choose
-  <!-- a feature (like <a href="glossary.xhtml#live_bookmark">Live Bookmarks</a> for
-  feeds) or --> a <a href="glossary.xhtml#plugin">plugin</a> in &brandShortName; to
-  handle the type, or save the type on your computer.</p>
-<p>To choose a handler for a type, select the type from the list. The current
-  handler for the type will turn into a menu. Open the menu and select the
-  handler you want to handle the type. Depending on the actual type, you can:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li>Choose an application by selecting it from the menu. If you want a local
-    application that is not in the menu to handle the type, select
-    <strong>Use other…</strong> from the menu and navigate to its location.</li>
-  <li>Choose a <!-- feature or --> plugin by selecting it from the menu.</li>
-  <li>Save files of this type on your computer by selecting
-    <strong>Save File</strong> from the menu. If you have selected the
-    <strong>Automatically download files to specified download folder</strong>
-    preference in the <strong>Downloads</strong> panel, &brandShortName; will
-    save content of this type on your computer automatically. Otherwise, when
-    you encounter this type, &brandShortName; will prompt you for a location on
-    your computer to save it to.</li>
-  <li>Tell &brandShortName; to <strong>always ask</strong> what to do when
-    encountering this type. When you choose this option, a dialogue will always be
-    shown when files of this type are accessed, and you can choose how to handle
-    that specific file from there.</li>
-</ul>
-
-<p><strong>Note:</strong> When a plugin is available to handle a type, and you
-  choose another handler for that type, &brandShortName; will only use your
-  chosen handler when you access the type directly. When the type is embedded
-  inside a web page, &brandShortName; will continue to use the plugin to handle
-  it. See also
-  <a href="nav_help.xhtml#plugins_and_downloads">Plugins and Downloads</a>.
-</p>
-
-<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="location_bar">Browser Preferences - Location Bar</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Location Bar preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Browser category, click Location Bar. (If no subcategories
-    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Location Bar Preferences panel lets you fine-tune the behaviour of the
-  Location Bar.</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li id="location_bar_autocomplete"><strong>Autocomplete</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Autocomplete from your browsing history as you type</strong>:
-        Select this to let &brandShortName; automatically show suggestions from
-        your browsing history when you type in the Location Bar.
-        <ul>
-          <li><strong>Match only web sites you&apos;ve typed previously</strong>:
-            Shows only web sites that you&apos;ve typed in the Location Bar and
-            not sites that were opened in other ways, such as clicking a link on
-            a web page.</li>
-          <li><strong>Only match locations, not web site titles</strong>: Shows
-            only web sites where the location matches what you typed. Websites
-            where the title matches what you typed will not show up as
-            autocomplete suggestions unless their location matches, too.</li>
-          <li><strong>Match</strong>:
-            <ul>
-              <li><strong>Anywhere in the location or title</strong>: The
-                autocomplete suggestions will include all web sites where what
-                you typed matches any part of the web site&apos;s location or
-                title.</li>
-              <li><strong>Anywhere but preferring word boundaries</strong>: The
-                autocomplete suggestions will include all web sites where what
-                you typed matches any part of the web site&apos;s location or
-                title but matches at word boundaries (see next point) are
-                preferred. This is the default setting.</li>
-              <li><strong>Only on word boundaries</strong>: The autocomplete
-                suggestions will include all web sites where what you typed
-                matches the beginning of any word contained in the
-                web site&apos;s location or title. Matches may also be found
-                inside a word if it contains medial capital letters (as in
-                CamelCase) since all non-lowercase characters are treated as
-                word boundaries.</li>
-              <li><strong>Only at the beginning of the location or
-                title</strong>: The autocomplete suggestions will include all
-                web sites where what you typed matches the beginning of the
-                web site&apos;s location or title.</li>
-            </ul></li>
-          <li><strong>Automatically prefill the best match</strong>: As you
-            type in the Location Bar, &brandShortName; will automatically
-            complete your web address using the visited web site it most closely
-            matches. <span class="unix"><strong>Note</strong>: Having this
-            option on will prefill local addresses (like paths to files on your
-            hard drive) even if you have turned off <q>Autocomplete from your
-            browsing history as you type</q>.</span></li>
-          <li><strong>Show list of matching results</strong>: As you type in
-            the Location Bar, &brandShortName; will show a drop-down list of
-            matching visited web addresses.
-            <span class="unix"><strong>Note</strong>: If you have turned off
-            <q>Autocomplete from your browsing history as you type</q>
-            matching results from locations on your hard drive will still be
-            shown in the drop-down list.</span></li>
-        </ul></li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Internet Search Engine</strong>:
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Show default search engine</strong>: Shows a drop-down list item,
-        allowing you to search with the default search engine for words you
-        enter.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-  <li><strong>Unknown Locations</strong>
-    <ul>
-      <li><strong>Add <q>www.</q> and <q>.com</q> to the location if a web page
-        is not found</strong>: Select this if you want &brandShortName; to
-        automatically add <tt>www.</tt> to the beginning and <tt>.com</tt> to
-        the end of a web page location that can&apos;t be found. For more
-        detailed information about this feature, see the online document
-        <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/docs/end-user/domain-guessing.html">
-        Domain Guessing</a>.</li>
-      <li><strong>Perform a web search when entered text is not a web
-        location</strong>: Select this to let &brandShortName; automatically
-        search the web for text entered in the Location Bar. If the text
-        you&apos;ve typed is not a web location, &brandShortName; will do a web
-        search when you press <kbd class="noMac">Enter</kbd>
-        <kbd class="mac">Return</kbd> in the Location Bar. See the online
-        document
-        <a href="http://www.mozilla.org/docs/end-user/internet-keywords.html">
-        Internet Keywords</a> for a more technical description about this
-        feature. <strong>Note</strong>: The search engine used can not be
-        changed by the <a href="#internet_search">Internet Search
-        Preferences</a>.</li>
-    </ul>
-  </li>
-</ul>
-
-<p>[<a href="#navigator_preferences">Return to beginning of section</a>]</p>
-
-<h2 id="internet_search">Browser Preferences - Internet Search</h2>
-
-<p>This section describes how to use the Internet Search preferences panel. If
-  you&apos;re not already viewing it, follow these steps:</p>
-
-<ol>
-  <li>Open the <span class="mac">&brandShortName;</span>
-    <span class="noMac">Edit</span> menu and choose Preferences.</li>
-  <li>Under the Browser category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories
-    are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)</li>
-</ol>
-
-<p>The Internet Search preferences panel allows you to configure how you search
-  using &brandShortName;:</p>
-
-<ul>
-  <li><strong>Default Search Engine</strong>:
-    <ul>